JP5198911B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. The rotation is started by the operation, and the rotation is stopped by the player operating the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. When all reels stop rotating, a winning combination is generated when a predetermined winning symbol combination (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter referred to as a symbol combination) is arranged on the winning line. To do.

  In this type of slot machine, when a special role that is advantageous to the player is elected, there is a notice that the special role is won by performing an effect that suggests that the special role has been won. Special types that have different types of special roles, and when any type of special role is elected, the special role is announced and then elected at a rate corresponding to the type of special role elected A slot machine for informing the type of a combination has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-325758 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, after being notified that the special role was won, the type of the special role won was notified at a rate corresponding to the type of the special role won, so it was won after the announcement. Since the period until the type of the special role is notified varies depending on the type of the selected special role, it is possible to guess the type of the special role won to some extent by the state that the type of the special role is not notified. It is possible, but since the type of special role will be known after that, the type of special role will be known, so in order to guess the type of special role that is elected, it is assumed that the type of special role is not reported Necessary, and when the special role was announced, the type of special role could not be estimated.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of estimating the type of a special prize only by performing.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is a slot machine in which one game is finished by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Before the display result is derived to the variable display device, a game is played without using a plurality of types of special prizes (BB) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (BB) advantageous to the player and the gaming value. A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a winning including a re-game winning (re-playing player) with a re-play (re-playing game) granting possible,
When it is determined that the special prize (BB) is allowed to be generated and the special prize (BB) is not generated, the decision to allow the special prize to be generated (BB winning flag) is performed in the next game. Carry-over means to carry over later,
When it is determined at the same time that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is allowed and the occurrence of the re-game prize (re-playing part) is permitted, the display result corresponding to the special prize (special role) Re-game winning priority derivation control means for displaying the display result corresponding to the re-game winning (re-game player) on the variable display device with priority.
When the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) among the plurality of types of special prizes (special roles) occurs, the first special gaming state (RB) is controlled, and the first When a second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) different from the special prize is generated, the player enters a second special gaming state (BB) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. Special gaming state control means to control;
One of the types of effects is selected with a predetermined selection probability from a plurality of types of effects (single effects, continuous effects 1 ) including different effects including a continuous effect that continues for a predetermined number of continuous games of two or more games. Production type selection means,
Production execution means for executing the type of production selected by the production type selection means;
With
The plurality of types of effects (single effect, continuous effect 1) are also determined to allow the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) to be generated. It is an effect that can be selected even when it is determined that the occurrence of winning (BB (1) to (5)) is allowed,
The number of types of special prizes (special roles) in which the operation procedures for generating a prize do not overlap with each other: X, and the replay prize when the continuous production is being executed by the pre-decision means (internal lottery) ( X <Z <X + Y · Z, where Y is the probability that it is determined that the occurrence of a replaying player) is permitted: Y, and the number of continuous games that is determined in advance for the two or more games in the continuous production is Z. As well as
The selection probability by the production type selection means is:
When it is determined that the occurrence of the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) or the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is permitted, the plurality of types It is determined that a specific production (single production) will be selected with the highest probability,
The probability that the occurrence of the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) is permitted when the specific effect (single effect) is executed and the specific effect (single effect) ) Is executed, the first special prize (RB (1) occupying the total probability of the probabilities determined to allow the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) to be generated. ) To (4)) The ratio of the probability that it is determined that the occurrence of the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) is determined by the pre-determining means (internal lottery). The first special prize (RB) occupying the total probability of the probability that it is decided to allow and the probability that the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is allowed to occur is determined. (1) to (4)) are determined to be higher than the ratio of the probability determined to allow the occurrence. It is characterized in that there.
According to this feature, when a specific performance is executed, the proportion of the first special prize and the second special prize that are actually allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means is permitted. Since the generation of the first special prize is permitted at a high ratio, the possibility of the first special prize among the first special prize and the second special prize may be permitted due to the difference in the production mode. It can be inferred whether or not is high. In addition, when it is determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated, the specific performance is most frequently executed, and when the specific performance is executed, the second is relatively viewed. Since it cannot be expected that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, when the second special prize is permitted when the specific performance is executed, the first special prize is more effective than the first special prize. Since the occurrence of the advantageous second special prize could not be expected, the unexpectedness to the player can be enhanced, so that the interest in such a case can be effectively enhanced.
In addition, the number of games that are expected to generate a re-game prize that makes it difficult to generate a special prize during a continuous performance, and the number of types of special prizes that do not overlap with each other for the operation procedure for generating a prize, Since the continuous performance is executed over a plurality of games less than the sum of the number of games required to generate the allowed special prize and the value obtained by adding the number of games, the special prize is allowed to be generated until the continuous performance ends. Since it is difficult to reliably determine whether or not the game has been determined, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special prize until the continuous performance ends. In addition, since the number of games for continuous production is determined in consideration of the number of games that are expected to generate replay prizes that make it difficult to generate special prizes during continuous production, the types of special prizes that do not overlap with each other The number of continuous games for continuous production can be increased without significantly increasing the number.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is a slot machine in which one game is finished by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Before the display result is derived to the variable display device, a game is played without using a plurality of types of special prizes (BB) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (BB) advantageous to the player and the gaming value. A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a winning including a re-game winning (re-playing player) with a re-play (re-playing game) granting possible,
When it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is allowed and the special prize (special role) has not occurred, the determination that the special prize is allowed to occur (winning flag for the special role) Carry-over means to carry over after the next game,
When it is determined at the same time that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is allowed and the occurrence of the re-game prize (re-playing part) is permitted, the display result corresponding to the special prize (special role) Re-game winning priority derivation control means for displaying the display result corresponding to the re-game winning (re-game player) on the variable display device with priority.
When the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) among the plurality of types of special prizes (special roles) occurs, the first special gaming state (RB) is controlled, and the first When a second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) different from the special prize is generated, the player enters a second special gaming state (BB) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. Special gaming state control means to control;
One of the types of effects is selected with a predetermined selection probability from a plurality of types of effects (single effects, continuous effects 1 ) including different effects including a continuous effect that continues for a predetermined number of continuous games of two or more games. Production type selection means,
Production execution means for executing the type of production selected by the production type selection means;
With
The plurality of types of effects (single effect, continuous effect 1) are also determined to allow the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) to be generated. It is an effect that can be selected even when it is determined that the occurrence of winning (BB (1) to (5)) is allowed,
The number of types of special prizes (special roles) in which the operation procedures for generating a prize do not overlap with each other: X, and the replay prize when the continuous production is being executed by the pre-decision means (internal lottery) ( X <Z <X + Y · Z, where Y is the probability that it is determined that the occurrence of a replaying player) is permitted: Y, and the number of continuous games that is determined in advance for the two or more games in the continuous production is Z. As well as
The selection probability by the production type selection means is:
When it is determined that the occurrence of the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) or the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is permitted, the plurality of types It is determined that a specific production (single production) will be selected with the highest probability,
The specific effect (occupying the probability that at least one of the plurality of effects is selected when it is determined that the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) is allowed to be generated) When the ratio of the probability of selecting the “single effect” is determined to allow the occurrence of the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)), at least any of the plurality of kinds of effects It is characterized in that it is determined to be higher than the ratio of the probability that the specific effect (single effect) occupies the probability of being selected.
According to this feature, when the occurrence of the first special prize is permitted, the ratio of the specific effect being executed is higher than when the second special prize is permitted. It can be estimated whether there is a high possibility that the occurrence of the first special prize among the first special prize and the second special prize is permitted. In addition, when it is determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated, the specific performance is most frequently executed, and when the specific performance is executed, the second is relatively viewed. Since it cannot be expected that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, when the second special prize is permitted when the specific performance is executed, the first special prize is more effective than the first special prize. Since the occurrence of the advantageous second special prize could not be expected, the unexpectedness to the player can be enhanced, so that the interest in such a case can be effectively enhanced.
In addition, the number of games that are expected to generate a re-game prize that makes it difficult to generate a special prize during a continuous performance, and the number of types of special prizes that do not overlap with each other for the operation procedure for generating a prize, that is, surely Since the continuous performance is executed over a plurality of games less than the sum of the number of games required to generate the allowed special prize and the value obtained by adding the number of games, the special prize is allowed to be generated until the continuous performance ends. Since it is difficult to reliably determine whether or not the game has been determined, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special prize until the continuous performance ends. In addition, since the number of games for continuous production is determined in consideration of the number of games that are expected to generate replay prizes that make it difficult to generate special prizes during continuous production, the types of special prizes that do not overlap with each other The number of continuous games for continuous production can be increased without significantly increasing the number.

In claims 1 and 2, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
The second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state in claims 1 and 2 is that the amount of game value that can be expected to be acquired with the occurrence of the special game state is the first. There are more special gaming states than one special gaming state, and the amount of gaming value that can be expected to be acquired during the second special gaming state is the amount of gaming value that can be expected to be acquired during the first special gaming state. Even if there are few things, what is necessary is just what can expect acquisition of more game value than a 1st special game state by the privilege accompanying a special game state.
Further, in claim 1 and 2, the production type selection means is capable of selecting the specific production when it is determined that at least the first special prize or the second special prize is permitted. The specific effect may be selected on the condition that it is determined that the generation of any special prize is allowed, or the first special prize or the second special prize is generated. In addition to the case where it is determined that the special prize is permitted, the specific effect may be selected when it is determined that none of the special prizes are permitted.
In addition, the number of types of the special prizes in which the operation procedures for generating a winning in claims 1 and 2 do not overlap each other means that when the operation is performed in the operation procedure for generating one special winning This is the number of special prizes that cannot be used to generate a special prize for the other part of the operating procedure. The number of types is not counted. For example, for the three special prizes, the two special prizes have overlapping operation procedures, and the two special prize operating procedures that overlap these operating procedures and the remaining special prize operating procedures do not overlap each other. But there are two types.
Further, in the first and second aspects, the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-game prize is allowed: Y is the occurrence of the re-game prize during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed For example, when it is determined that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed, or when the transition display result is derived, the possibility that a re-game prize will be allowed than usual is determined. In the case of having a plurality of probabilities determined to allow the occurrence of a replay prize, such as when the game is controlled to a replay high probability game state in which the probability to be determined becomes high, the continuous game number of continuous effects is set to Z The probability that it is determined that the re-game winning is permitted in the gaming state in which the continuous effect is executed is Y, and X < Z <X + Y · Z may be satisfied.

A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or 2,
Of the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) and the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)), the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) ) On the condition that it is determined to allow the generation of a special effect (continuous effect 2, continuous effect 3) different from the plural types of effects (single effect, continuous effect 1). It is characterized in that it comprises.
According to this feature, when the special performance is executed, and any one of the special prizes is allowed to occur, the second special prize that is more advantageous to the player than the first special prize is obtained. Therefore, the player's expectation can be effectively enhanced by the difference in the production mode.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
When it is determined to allow any one of the multiple types of special prizes (special roles) to occur, a specific display result (chance) is derived to the variable display device. A specific derivation control means for
The specific derivation control means determines whether the specific display result (chance item) is easily derived or the specific display result (chance item) according to the type of special prize (special role) determined to be permitted. One of a plurality of controls including a control that is difficult to derive is selected, and a control for deriving the specific display result (chance eye) based on the selected control is performed.
According to this feature, even if the occurrence of a special prize is allowed, there are some cases in which a specific display result is easily derived depending on the type, and it is difficult to derive a specific display result. Even so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a special prize is allowed to occur.
The control in which the specific display result is not easily derived is, for example, the number of operation timings in which the specific display result is derived among a plurality of operation timings compared to the control in which the specific display result is easily derived. This is a control with a low rate of deriving a specific display result as compared to a case where a control that easily derives a specific display result is selected, such as a control determined to be small. For example, in a control where a specific display result is easily derived, a specific display result is derived even if operated at a timing before the specific display result is displayed. For example, control for deriving a specific display result only when an operation is performed at the timing when the display result is displayed. Further, the control in which the specific display result is difficult to be derived may be a control in which no specific display result is derived.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) allows the occurrence of the first special prize (RB (1) to (4)) and the first general prize other than the special prize (black cherry, net cherry) , White cherry), the first special decision (RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB (4) + white cherry), which is simultaneously determined to allow the occurrence of white cherry) A second special decision (RB (1) for simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of a prize (RB (1) to (4)) and to allow the generation of a second general prize (watermelon) other than the special prize. ) + Watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet), the fact that the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is allowed to occur and the first general prize (black cherry, net cherry, A third special decision (BB (3 + Black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white cherry), the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) and the second general prize are permitted. 4th special decision (BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet) that simultaneously determines that the occurrence of (watermelon) is allowed Is possible to do)
The probability of the first special decision (RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB (4) + white cherry) and the second special decision (RB (1) + watermelon, The ratio of the probability that the second special decision (RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet) will occupy the total probability of the probability that RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet) will be made; The probability of the third special decision (BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white cherry) and the fourth special decision (BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1) and the fourth special decision (BB (1) + watermelon, BB) (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet) The ratio of the probability of being, is characterized in that performs the first to fourth special determined at different probabilities.
According to this feature, the ratio of the probability that the second special decision is made in the total probability of the probability that the first special decision is made and the probability that the second special decision is made, and the third special decision is Since the ratio of the probability that the fourth special decision is made to the total probability of the probability that the fourth special decision is made differs from the probability that the fourth special decision is made, whether the first general prize has occurred or the second general decision Depending on whether a winning has occurred, it is possible to change the expectation as to which of the first special winning and the second special winning with different advantages of the special gaming state to be transferred thereafter is allowed. Furthermore, whether the first special prize is permitted or the second special prize is permitted depending on whether the first general prize has occurred or the second general prize has occurred. It is impossible to discriminate between the first special prize and the second special prize, and the special prize having the higher advantage of the first special prize and the second special prize is obtained. The player's expectation that the occurrence is allowed is not impaired.

A slot machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The generation of a re-game prize (re-playing role) with the grant of a re-game (re-play game) that allows the game to be played without using the gaming value and the fact that the special prize (special role) is allowed to occur Replays that cause the variable display device to display the display result corresponding to the re-game winning (re-playing role) with priority over the display result corresponding to the special winning (special role) when it is determined to allow Winning priority derivation control means,
A transition display result derivation control means for performing control for deriving a transition display result (watermelon, RT transition role) when it is determined to allow the generation of a specific prize (watermelon);
When the transition display result (watermelon, RT transition combination) is derived, the transition display result (watermelon, RT transition combination) is derived to determine that the re-game winning (re-game combination) is allowed to occur. First replay high probability state control means for controlling to a first replay high probability state (RT (3)) performed with a higher probability than before,
When it is determined that the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is allowed to be generated, the second game is determined to allow the second game winning (re-game player) to be generated. The second re-game high probability state (RT (4)) is performed with a higher probability than before the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is made. Replay high probability state control means;
With
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) simultaneously determines that the second special prize (BB (1) to (5)) is allowed to be generated and the specific prize (watermelon) is allowed to be generated. It is possible to make a first specific decision, a second specific decision to independently determine that the occurrence of the specific winning (watermelon) is allowed,
The effect execution means includes special effect execution means for executing a special effect (continuous effect) when the transition display result (watermelon, RT transition combination) is derived.
According to this feature, after the transition display result is derived, it is controlled to the replay high probability state, and during this time, the transition to the replay high probability state is triggered when the second special prize is permitted. It is difficult to determine whether or not it has shifted to the replay high probability state when the specific winning is permitted alone, and the special effect is executed in such a state. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation that the occurrence of the occurrence of the In particular, since the specific prize from which the transition display result is derived is allowed at the same time as the second special prize, it is difficult to determine whether or not the special prize has been allowed even though the special effect has been executed. Under such circumstances, it can be expected that the generation of a second special prize that is more advantageous than the first special prize is permitted.
It should be noted that the decision to allow the occurrence of the specific prize may not be determined at the same time as allowing the occurrence of the first special prize, or may allow the occurrence of the second special prize. It may be determined at the same time as allowing the occurrence of the first special prize with a probability lower than the probability determined at the same time.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “replay”, “watermelon”, There are 21 types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other such as “black cherry”, “net cherry (shaded cherry in the figure)”, “white cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” in a predetermined order. ing. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number) Is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed). 36a, automatic checkout for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is effective / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB described later The switch 36b functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and as a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in the normal state. In the setting change mode, the winning probability of the internal lottery described later Reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (development rate), power ON / OFF Power switch 39 is provided which is operated when that.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper side of the reel 2R. There are five types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols, the upper line of reel 2L, the middle of reel 2C, the lower portion of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set straddling the right-down symbol. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply, monitoring the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 When detecting a voltage drop, the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the main CPU 41a is not inputted A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the player, disconnection for monitoring an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A monitoring IC 50 and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above are connected to the rendering control board 90, which is disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated Processing for identifying the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on the signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs the pressure drop signal to the sub-control unit 91, and the light receiving devices 56b and 57b. The sub CPU 91a receives commands sent from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99, and performs various controls for performing effects. And each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are connected to each other via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in this embodiment). As a result, the wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions on the main body of the slot machine 1 is facilitated, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent a connector connecting portion from being searched for during wiring connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, so the cable and the board that connect these boards and the board to the game electronic component are: The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving instrument is, for example, operating various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of the signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from the game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool, and a BB having a higher advantage among BB and RB described later is won. (In this embodiment, it is suggested that BB is likely to be won when the combination of watermelons or chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5 as will be described later. Can be set to a state where there is a high possibility that the game has been won.), For example, when illegal sales such as providing to a player at the start of business of a game store, etc. There is a risk of damage.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side of the cable 600a. Connection between the connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is controlled by the member.

  The connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the release restricting portion must be destroyed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Unauthorized sales can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connection between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop after the reel starts rotating until the reel is stopped as in the present embodiment, it is between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. For the connection between the side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so the front door 1b is opened. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state in which the notification of being made is not made.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine in a state accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed, If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a covering member that covers the sealing piece of the substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is no challenge time (a gaming state in which the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) or a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, the gaming state is a challenge between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a CT signal indicating that the time is in progress and a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the challenge bonus is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected. Has been.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a uses a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above in order to manage sales with a hall computer. Control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player as a result of winning to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform control to cancel the output. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, The medal IN signals for the set number of bets are collectively output.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collectively collected from the outside. It is possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the bet number, and the control related to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment shows that when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time a medal is paid out. Output a signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the actual payout Since the number of medals coined out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively at the end of the medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating that φ1 to φ4 is excited is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in this embodiment) without performing the next game start operation, and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released (Td). That is, after the rotor 32a is stopped, when a predetermined time has passed without the start operation of the next game being performed, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so that while the player is playing Can maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced, while it is possible to reduce the load on the components of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation control are performed. By performing the stop control of the reel motor in combination with the excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and thereafter by the three-phase excitation stop control. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position, the rotor 32a is rotating. The rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, BB At the end, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied In addition, five types of initialization are performed in different regions to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the stopped phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, by not initializing the stop phase work, By maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are first rotated after the setting change. Even in this case, these stop phases can be specified, but even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting is changed. 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Thereafter, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excited by state, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without waiting for the game start operation) as in the stop phase excitation state maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the state (the same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) has elapsed, and in this way there will be no burden on the parts that make up the stepping motor. Deterioration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and when it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset) is performed. The operation is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the / setting switch 38 is operated).

  In this embodiment, medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflow medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a and the full tank state is determined. However, whether or not the overflow tank 35 is provided and the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by the full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. It may be determined. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the full tank state is reached, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the medal insertion is not permitted. Even if the insertion of a medal is detected during the replay game, the main CPU 41a inserts a valid medal. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the game control is finished, the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 is detected only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, in a game in which medals are not inserted from the outside, monitoring whether or not the amount of stored medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full, The amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full even though the medal storage amount does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored whether or not it has become unnecessary, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player and increases the labor of the game hall clerk. There is a problem that it ends up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game ends, so that the insertion of medals is detected effectively. The determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is not wasted, and the full tank can be monitored efficiently. Can reduce the control load required to determine the tangled state and reduce the frequency of full tan errors as much as possible. Is possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is useless. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load for determining the full tank condition and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, but whether or not the tank is full at least once per game. For example, after completion of the game control, it may be determined whether or not the next game medal can be filled up, or whether the game is started. A determination may be made as to whether or not the tank is full at the time of detection or when the game control ends.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. Then, when it is determined that the tank is full, it is controlled to a full tank error state at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted. It is possible to monitor the full tank state efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank state, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. Or allowed to think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not performed wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or the medal payout operation is stopped once in a state where the medal payout operation is performed by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full at the end of the game control. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state command, a standby command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used for setting the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. This is transmitted every time stop operation of each reel is performed and stop control is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command indicates the game state of the next game (normal game state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), RT (4)) , BB, RB, etc.) and the remaining number of games in RT (1) to (3), and a command that can specify the set value that is currently set. Sent after the end command is sent and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF. Whether the bet number can be set and the specified number of bets has not yet been set, and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 has been accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt process described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and an operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is a timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, a plurality of commands can be transmitted. Even in the case of continuous transmission, transmission is performed with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and these continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In addition, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are interrupted by the basic processing. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  Further, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, Alternatively, a newly generated command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands) (in the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that when the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or when the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority. After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, the detection state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process described above (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of the door monitoring process). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the door command is given priority over the normal command as described above, and the door command is also transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) is acquired, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2, that is, the switch monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, the 1 acquired in the above-described port input process The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to logically OR each separately, and use the result, 1 BET switch 5, MAXB Determining T switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and the demo pattern is controlled even if a standby command is received in such a state. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, the demonstration effect is executed when the stop state is released.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying the special role is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even when the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. , A slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool, and a slot machine set in a state where there is a high possibility that a BB having a higher advantage among BB and RB, which will be described later, is won ( In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is suggested that BB (2) is likely to be won when the combination of watermelons or chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5. Possibility that it can be set to a high state.) Can be effectively suppressed illegal sales such offers to the player customer in the amusement shop sales start like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Because it becomes possible, the slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool, and further, a BB having a higher advantage among BB and RB described later is set to a high possibility of being won. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine to a player at the start of business at a game store can be more effectively suppressed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 that control the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. , Such as speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. Since it is informed by the production device and is in a state where it is easier to discriminate, the slot machine set to the state where the special role is won using the driving tool, and more advantageous among BB and RB described later. The high BB is a slot machine that is set to be is likely the state that won, it is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to provide to the player customers in the amusement shop sales at the start or the like.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component directly controlled by the main control unit 41, the state returns to the state before the power interruption when the main control unit 41 is activated, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification of the special role may be notified using the notification LED.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is made by notifying that effect. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even when the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. If the detection is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is performed.

  The front door 1b needs to be opened in order to perform some illegal act on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, but in this embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, that fact Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, the door showing the detection state after the change. Only by transmitting a command, it is not determined whether the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a detects the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is open based on the detected state of the door, and the door open notification is performed based on the determination result, so the main CPU 41a notifies the opening of the front door 1b. In determining whether or not the front door 1b is open from the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 (door open detection switch Chi chattering prevention determination of 25) it is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Therefore, even when the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Further, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing blurring of reel rotation and medals to be paid out. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the detection state of the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are in progress of the game. Whether an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state is valid for the progress of the game when the switch detection state changes. The sub CPU 91a can identify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation is valid, so that one sheet is transmitted. Operation of BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement switch 10 In addition to the timing when the control of the game is made effective and coincides with the timing at which the control of the game proceeds, the effect is executed when the operation of these switches is invalid, that is, at a timing not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. It becomes possible.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection means is not installed, but the operation means is originally installed for advancing the game and detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state in progress, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. However, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines whether the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the checkout switch 10 are operated and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (e.g., chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. However, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, an operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management does not become complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since it is configured to store in the buffer, if the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer (normally If an operation detection command is stored by interrupting the command while it is stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation fluctuations and However, it may affect other controls such as blurring at the time of paying out the command. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked for 60 seconds continuously based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the validated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored in response to a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and then returns a report indicating that there are no two or more consecutive beams that are shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When a touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  In one inspection command, it is possible to specify only one output port, components corresponding to the output port, and operation modes, and when different components of the output port are operated simultaneously and inspected, Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit 40 inspection commands continuously even if only the test for operating all the electrical parts is performed, and the operation of parts other than the electrical parts is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command for designating the operation of a plurality of illumination parts, an examination command for designating the operation of the illumination parts, an inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker, and an inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is being performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a receives it from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode specified by the inspection command such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and the CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the part and operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration part are specified. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the identified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. The reception buffer overflows, and there is a possibility that the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the command transmission buffer is provided. Accordingly, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated as many as possible so as not to overflow assuming a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) The number of test commands can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the receiving buffer storage area (128 commands in this embodiment) without being limited according to the efficiency of the operation test. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, liquid crystal display 51, and touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to specify only one performance component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area in the reception buffer that can store more commands than the number of performance components, When performing production component operation tests in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production component are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. It can be performed.

  In the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as a touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. If the next inspection command is mistakenly transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation test is performed. There is a problem that the detection of the operation detection status of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check and performs the touch panel operation check, the sub CPU 91a performs the command reception interrupt process until the touch operation is detected. During this period, new commands are not received, and even if a new command is transmitted during this period, the new command is not detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. It is not received and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command is already received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check, even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected in the same manner as described above. The inspection can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that another inspection command specifying the operation check is continuously performed. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a gaming state, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB), a normal gaming state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), RT (2) (replay time (2) ), RT (3) (replay time (3)), and RT (4) (replay time (4)), but 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets in any gaming state. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is RB, the normal gaming state, or RT (1) to RT (4), the game can be started when 3 is set as the bet number. It becomes possible. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the number of bets regardless of the gaming state. As a result, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when 3 is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes. Of the special roles, BB (6) and BB (7), which will be described later, are always won in the winning game, and are not carried over after the next game.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the bonuses in the slot machine 1 are big bonuses (1) to (7) (big bonus is called BB) and regular bonuses (1) to (7) (regular bonuses are special bonuses). RB) is defined as watermelon as a small part, one piece, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and bell, and replays (1) and (2) as re-playing parts.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (4), or RB. . Furthermore, even if the game state is the same, the combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether special combinations are being carried over.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), and no special role is carried over (as described later, special in RT (1) (3) When a winning combination is won, the game is shifted to the normal gaming state or RT (4), so that the special combination is not carried over in RT (1) (3)), BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 Sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (3), BB (4), BB (5), BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white cherry, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (2), RB (3), RB (4), RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + Net cherry, RB (4) + White cherry, BB (6), BB (7), Replay (1), Play (2), watermelon, +1 sheets watermelon, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, bell becomes the subject of an internal lottery.

  In addition, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (2) or RT (4), and any special role is carried over (the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3) as will be described later) In BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) are won, the program moves to RT (4), so special roles are always carried over in RT (4)). Replay (1) , Replay (2), Watermelon, Watermelon + 1 sheet, Black cherry, Net cherry, White cherry, Bell are subject to internal lottery. When the gaming state is RB, watermelon, watermelon + 1, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and bell are targeted for internal lottery.

  The black cherry is awarded when the symbol “black cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the right reel in any gaming state, and three medals are paid out. The net cherry is awarded when the symbol “net cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the right reel in any gaming state, and three medals are paid out. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the right reel in any gaming state, and three medals are paid out. If the symbols “black cherry”, “net cherry” or “white cherry” are stopped at the upper or lower stage of the right reel, the winning lines L2, L5 or the winning lines L3, L4 are displayed on the two winning lines. A combination of black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries is prepared, and black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries are won on two winning lines, so six medals are paid out.

  The watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and three medals are paid out. One is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black Cherry-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. (Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. When Replay (1) or Replay (2) is won. Although there is no payout of medals, the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so in effect the three medals corresponding to the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game are paid out. Same thing.

  RB (1) wins when a combination of “Black 7-White 7-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB, and RB (2) is in a gaming state other than RB. When a combination of “Black 7-Net 7-Black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines, the winning combination is made, and RB (3) becomes “Black 7-Net 7” on any of the winning lines in a game state other than RB. -Wins when the combination of “Net 7” is complete, and RB (4) wins when the combination of “Black 7—Net 7—White 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. It becomes.

  When RB (1) to (4) wins, the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, particularly the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or an 8-game winning ( When the type of a combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first.

  BB (1) is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB, and BB (2) is in a gaming state other than RB. A winning combination is made when a combination of “white 7-white 7-black 7” is arranged in any of the winning lines, and BB (3) becomes “white 7-black 7” in any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. -Black 7 "combination is awarded, and BB (4) is awarded when" White 7-Black 7-Net 7 "combination is available on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. BB (5) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-black 7-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB, and BB (6) is a game other than RB. In the state, either of the winning lines -BB (7) is awarded when the combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is available on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. .

  When BB (1) to (7) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB. When the process shifts to BB, the process shifts to RB described above simultaneously with the shift to BB. When the RB is finished, if the BB is not finished, the process proceeds to the RB again, and the RB is repeatedly controlled until the BB is finished. That is, during BB, it is always controlled to RB.

  The BB transferred by winning the BB (1) to (5) is finished when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB exceeds 465, and transferred by winning the BB (6). The BB is terminated when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB exceeds 300, and the BB transferred by winning the BB (7) is the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB. When the number exceeds 100, the process ends. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the acquired random numbers for internal lottery and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination, a small combination and a small combination may be simultaneously selected in one game. However, for different types of special roles, small roles and re-playing roles, the range of judgment values to be won is not specified, and different types of special roles, small roles and re-playing roles are exclusive. Lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), and no special role is carried over, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2 ) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (3), BB (4), BB (5), BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white Cherry, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (2), RB (3), RB (4), RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB (4) + White Cherry, BB (6), BB (7), Replay (1), Replay (2), Watermelon, Watermelon + 1 piece, Black Cherry, Net Cherry, White Cherry, Bell Read sequentially.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (2) or RT (4), and any special role is carried over, replay (1), replay (2), watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, black cherry , Net cherry, white cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RB, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are the subject of the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, only the general winning combination storing work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Note that even if the winning status of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, the same in BB (1) + replay (1) winning and BB (2) + replay (1) winning) The same address is stored as the index data, and in such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Become.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously won, such as when a special role and a small role are simultaneously won (BB (1 ) + Watermelon, BB (1) + bell, etc.), the number of sliding symbols is determined so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in the winning line, and the winning special role is won For stop operation positions that cannot be drawn into the line in the range of up to 4 frames, create a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so that the selected small role is drawn to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum, The reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you can't withdraw a special role that is elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can align and stop the small roles that are elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn. However, priority is given to the control of aligning the small role on the winning line over the special role, and it is possible to win the special role only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. May be.

  If a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (BB (1) + replay (1), etc.) A stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols is determined so as to draw the selected re-gamer to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. In addition, as will be described later, “replay” and “bell”, which are symbols constituting the re-gamer, are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In addition, since it can be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L by the player, Regardless of the operation timing of 8C and 8R, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line simultaneously with the re-playing combination.

  If multiple types of small roles are elected at the same time (watermelon + 1 etc.), the top of the winning small roles will be drawn as much as possible within the 4-frame range. For the stop operation position where a small number with a large number of payouts can not be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, a small number with a small number of payouts among the selected small roles A stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to draw the winning combination into the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a small combination with a large number of payouts can be stopped among the selected small combinations that have been selected in the drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line, If control is performed to stop them together and the winning combination with a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line cannot be withdrawn, it will not be able to withdraw a small role with a large number of payouts. If it is possible to stop a combination of small winning combinations with a small number of payouts, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped, and the winning combination is stopped within the pull-in range of 4 frames. Control will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It becomes possible to win a few small roles. When a plurality of types of small combinations with different payout numbers can be drawn at the same time, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, and a plurality of types of small combinations are not aligned on the winning line at the same time.

  Special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously, such as when multiple types of small roles are elected while special roles are carried over from before the previous game, or when special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously. (BB (1) + watermelon + 1 etc.), the number of sliding symbols is set so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in the winning line. For the stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames, the number of sliding symbols is determined so that the winning small role with the largest number of payouts will be drawn into the winning line within the range of 4 frames. In the stop operation position where the selected special role and the small role with a large payout number among the selected small roles cannot be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, the payout number is small among the selected small roles Prize winning line 4 to create a stop control table number of sliding frames is determined to draw the maximum extent of the frame, performing stop control of the reels. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you cannot pull in a special role that has been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, arrange a small role with a large number of payouts out of the winning roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If it can be stopped, it will be controlled to stop them together, and special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line will not be able to withdraw the small role with a large number of payouts among the selected small roles In the winning line, if you can stop a small combination with a small number of payouts out of the small combinations that have been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control will be stopped and aligned, and it will not be selected The role is a four-frame pull. So that the control to stop Te removed in range is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it becomes possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be withdrawn. Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It is possible to win a prize. In the case where a special role and a small role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the special role is withdrawn and the special role and the small role are not aligned on the winning line. Are drawn only with small payouts with a large number of payouts, so that a plurality of types of small roles are not arranged on the winning line at the same time.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and multiple types of small roles are selected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn. , It is possible to win a small role, and moreover, priority is given to the control of aligning a small role with a large number of payouts on the winning line over a small number with a small number of payouts among a plurality of small roles. It is possible to win a small role with a small number of payouts only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. However, priority is given to the control of aligning the small role on the winning line over the special role, as Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. Only when a small role with a large number of payouts cannot be drawn, a small role with a small number of payouts is awarded. Of the number of payouts Only if you do not retracted also no small role, it may have made it possible to win a special role.

  Next, reach eyes and chance eyes will be described.

  The reach in this embodiment can be derived when a special role (including a single special role and a simultaneous combination of a small role and a special role) is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4). It is a display mode.

  In this embodiment, when the BB (1) to (5) and the RB (1) to (4) are elected in the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4), the reach is derived. If none of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) has been won, control is performed so that no reach is derived. For this reason, when the reach is derived, it is suggested that BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) are elected.

  In addition, the chance in the present embodiment is a normal gaming state, when a special role (including a single special role and a simultaneous combination of a small role and a special role) is won in RT (1) to (4), or This is a display mode that can be derived when a watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, that is, a small role that may be missed is won and the selected small role is missed.

  In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4), when BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) are elected, or watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, When black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are won, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, BB (1) to (5), RB (1) to (4), watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, If none of the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are won, control is performed so that chances are not derived. For this reason, when the chance chance is derived, it is suggested that BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) may be elected.

  In this embodiment, when BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are elected, BB (1) (2) and RB (1) are elected Control is performed to derive reach eyes and chance eyes at a higher rate. Specifically, when BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are won, the stop operation position from which the reach eye can be derived and the stop operation position from which the chance eye can be derived are BB ( 1) (2), Stop control is performed using stop control tables determined more than when RB (1) is elected.

  Thus, when BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are won, reach eyes and chance eyes are likely to appear, but BB (1) (2), RB (1 ) Is won, and reach and chance eyes are less likely to appear than when BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are won, Even if a reach or chance is not derived, the player's expectation that the BB or RB is won will not be lost.

  In this embodiment, control is performed so that reach eyes and chance eyes can be derived even when BB (1) (2) and RB (1) are won, but BB (1) (2 ), RB (1) may be controlled so that no reach eyes or chance eyes are derived at all.

  As in this example, when special roles and small roles are won at the same time, if a stop operation is made at the timing when the drawing pattern of the winning special roles and the winning symbols are overlapped In addition, in the case of controlling the drawing of the special role composition pattern over the small role composition symbol, the special role composition symbol is not drawn and the small role composition symbol is drawn, and the small role is won. In this case, there is a problem that the winning of the special role that may be won simultaneously will be denied, and even if a small role that has the possibility of winning simultaneously is won, the winning of the special role cannot be expected. On the other hand, if a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, the constituent symbol of the special role will be drawn in preference to the constituent symbol of the small role, and the selected small role will be missed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that will occur.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, for the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon stops on one of the winning lines, and BB (1), RB (2 The display mode in which the “black 7” symbol that constitutes) stops on any winning line, and the display mode in which the “white 7” symbol that constitutes BB (2) stops on any winning line is the largest. It is arranged beyond the pull-in range of 4 frames, and there is a stop operation position that can aim at the “watermelon” design and “black 7” design at the same time, and a stop operation position that can aim at the “watermelon” design and “white 7” design at the same time. It is an array that does not. For the middle reel, a display mode in which the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon stops on any winning line, and the “black 7” symbol constituting BB (1) stops on any winning line. The display mode, the display mode in which the “white 7” symbols constituting BB (2) and RB (1) stop on any of the winning lines, are arranged to exceed the maximum draw range of 4 frames, The arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position where the “watermelon” symbol and “black 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time, and no stop operation position where the “watermelon” symbol and “white 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time. In addition, for the right reel, the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon stops on one of the winning lines, and the “black 7” symbol constituting BB (1) (2) and RB (1) The display mode that stops on the winning line is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames, and there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “watermelon” symbol and the “black 7” symbol simultaneously. It has become.

  In the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, that is, BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) and watermelon that do not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time And BB (1), BB (2) or BB (2), even if a watermelon that may win simultaneously with BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) wins. ) Or RB (1) won't be denied, and when a watermelon that could win at the same time wins, the expectation of winning BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) Can be reliably increased. Furthermore, even when BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) and watermelon are won simultaneously, the configuration symbol of BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) takes precedence over the configuration symbol of watermelon. The winning watermelon will not be missed due to being pulled in, and BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) and the watermelon will be won at the same time, causing a disadvantage to the player Can be prevented.

  In addition, for the right reel, a display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol constituting the black cherry stops on any winning line, and the “black 7” symbol constituting BB (3) is on any winning line. The display mode that stops is arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, and there is an array that does not have stop operation positions that can aim at the “black cherry” symbol and “black 7” symbol simultaneously, In the lottery, BB (3) + black cherry, that is, BB (3) and black cherry that do not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time can be won simultaneously, so there is a possibility of winning simultaneously with BB (3) Even if a black cherry wins, the winning of BB (3) will not be denied, and when a black cherry that may win at the same time wins, Expectations it is possible to reliably increase the that. In addition, even when BB (3) and black cherry are selected at the same time, it is not possible to miss the winning black cherry because the BB (3) symbol is drawn in preference to the black cherry symbol. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the simultaneous winning of BB (3) and black cherry. The same applies to the relationship between BB (4) and net cherry, and BB (5) and white cherry.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, BB (1), BB (2), or RB (1) and one piece can be won simultaneously, and any one or more reels constituting one piece (left and right reels) Is a display mode in which the “black 7” symbol and the “black cherry” symbol in the middle reel are stopped on one of the winning lines, and the symbols (BB) constituting the BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) In case of (1), all reel “Black 7” designs, and in case of BB (2) and RB (1), “White 7” design of middle reel, “Black 7” design of right reel) The display mode that stops on the pay line is arranged within 4 frames which is the maximum drawing range, and constitutes BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) constituting one piece. There is a stop operation position where the symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  However, in this embodiment, one sheet is always selected at the same time as the watermelon, and for all reels, the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon and BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) are configured. The display mode in which the symbols stop on one of the winning lines, and the display mode in which the symbols that make up one piece stop on any of the winning lines are arranged beyond the maximum draw range of 4 frames, The "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the watermelon and the symbol that constitutes the BB (1), BB (2), or RB (1), and the symbol that constitutes one piece are arranged so that there is no stop operation position. Furthermore, the expected payout value when a stop operation is performed aiming at the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Watermelon, BB (2 + Watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 value of the winning probability multiplied by the number of watermelon payouts) Expected payout value (watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1) winning probability and one payout If the stop operation is aimed at the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon, the symbol that constitutes BB (1), BB (2), or RB (1), More medals can be obtained than when the stop operation is performed aiming at a symbol constituting one sheet. As a result, the stop operation aiming at the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon, that is, one display mode in which the symbol constituting BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) stops on any winning line. It is possible to prompt a stop operation at a timing that does not stop the display mode in which the symbols constituting the symbol stop on any of the winning lines, and the configuration of BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) BB (1), BB (2), or RB (1) that could be won at the same time will be denied if one component symbol is drawn without being drawn and one of them wins. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the winning of the special role cannot be expected when the small role that has the possibility of winning simultaneously is won.

  In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the winning of the special role can be determined accordingly, it did not suggest any information other than the winning of the special role depending on the reel stop mode. In addition, in the conventional slot machine, since the stop mode at the time of winning a small role alone is different from the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of a small role and a special role, is the special role won according to the stop mode? If the player is able to determine whether or not he / she has not won the special role, there is a problem that the expectation is lost.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet , RB (1) + watermelon + 1 is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, -Watermelon-Watermelon "is controlled to match the combination, but if watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is elected," watermelon-watermelon- Among the stop operation positions at which the “watermelon” combination can be drawn into the winning line, the stop operation position at which the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3; When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the prize lines L1 to L5, control is performed to align the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be aligned only to the winning lines L4, L5, and only when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L1, L2, L3. While the control of aligning the “watermelon-watermelon” combination to the winning lines L4 and L5 is performed, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon If +1 is selected, the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is selected from the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” stop operation positions. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon” can be aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5 and the stop operation position where the combination can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L5, The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is adjusted to the winning lines L4, L5, and the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be aligned only to the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Only when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned with L5, the control of aligning the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 is performed.

  In other words, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is selected, and the stop operation that can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" into the winning line When the stop operation is performed at the position, the control of aligning the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in preference to the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5 is performed, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1 ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, and the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line When the stop operation is performed at, control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3. You have me.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is selected, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon Is highly likely to match the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and +1 watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1 In such a case, there is a high possibility that the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. That is, when watermelon wins when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is elected, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, The winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match is different from when the watermelon wins when BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and (b)-(1), in the internal lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + the sum of the winning probabilities (A + B + E) of the winning probabilities (A + B + E + G) ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability (C + D + F + H) BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 Sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + one winning probability (C + D + F) of the ratio of winning watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, Watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, B (2) + +1 Like watermelon, is doing the RB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece of lottery.

  As a result, BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1), that is, the case where the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than the case where the watermelon is elected alone, that is, Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time as the special role, the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3, or the winning line L4, L5. The player's expectation for the special role can be changed.

  Furthermore, there is a possibility that a special role will be won regardless of whether the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line that includes a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” Regardless of which winning line is used, the player's expectation that the special role is won will not be lost.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and (b)-(2), BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, and RB (1) + watermelon are selected in the internal lottery. BB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece, BB (2) + watermelon than the ratio of the combined probability value (A + B) of the winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon in the total probability value (A + B + E) The ratio of the sum of the winning probabilities (C + D) of BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 in the sum of winning probabilities (C + D + F) of +1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + Watermelon + 1 lottery.

  As a result, a special role that can be expected to win more medals than BB, that is, RB, when one watermelon and one piece of watermelon are won at the same time than when one piece of watermelon is won at the same time. At the same time, the winning percentage will increase, so whether the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning lines L1, L2, L3, the winning lines L4, L5, Thus, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the BB having higher advantage among BB and RB.

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether the BB is won or the RB is won from the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” No matter which winning line is aligned, the player's expectation for winning the BB having the higher advantage of BB and RB will not be impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B- (3), in the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon when the set value is 1 to 3 BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability (A1 + B1 + C1 + D1 + E1 + F1 + G1 + H1) Set value is 4 ~ than the ratio of winning probability (C1 + D1 + F1 + H1) of +1 watermelon, 1 BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 Watermelon in case of 6, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + Su The sum of the winning probabilities for the sum of the winning probabilities (A2 + B2 + C2 + D2 + E2 + F2 + G2 + H2) for +1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery.

  As a result, the setting values 4 to 6, that is, the settings 1 to 3 are set when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than when the watermelon is elected alone. Since the ratio of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is set is increased, the winning lines including the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. It can be estimated whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player, depending on whether there is a pay line L4 or L5.

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether the setting values 1 to 3 are set as the setting value or the settings 4 to 6 are set from the winning line in which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged. Regardless of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in any winning line, the player's sense of expectation that settings 4-6 having higher advantages among the settings 1-6 are set is impaired. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, in the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB ( 1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery, but BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 only as a lottery object, if watermelon, watermelon + 1 is won, be sure to be BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) You may make it win simultaneously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet and BB, RB are selected simultaneously, but only one of watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, and BB, RB may be selected simultaneously.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon are selected, and the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is drawn into the winning line. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is made, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to align with the winning lines L1, L2, L3. (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line In addition, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to align with the winning lines L4, L5, but watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon The winning line that is easy to align is different depending on whether you have chosen, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet For example, the configuration may be such that a specific winning line is easily aligned in one case, and a winning line different from the specific winning line is easily aligned in the other case.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon are selected, and the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is drawn into the winning line. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the player can perform the operation, a control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher ratio than the winning lines L4, L5. Sheets, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, and the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at a possible stop operation position, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon are selected, and the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is matched only to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line When the operation is performed, control may be performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) occupying the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon. ) + Watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon winning probability combined ratio and watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 Watermelons with different probabilities of the combined probability of winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 , BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon +1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon , RB (1) + watermelon is won, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, +1 watermelon, BB (1 ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, and the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is made at, the player's winning for special role due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' The expectation can be changed, but in the internal lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet winning probability combined value and watermelon +1 sheet , BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet Is selected and the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is pulled to the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be inserted, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon are selected. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” The player's expectation level for winning the special role may be varied depending on the winning line in which the combinations are combined.

  Also, in the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon , RB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability ratio and watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon winning probability BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon winning ratio of the combined value of the winning values of watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet Do, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) Watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 Sheets, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon were selected, and the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" could be drawn into the winning line By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned with the case, there is a change in the player's expectation for winning the special role due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' You may make it.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 in the total value of winning probability of RB (1) + watermelon, BB ( 2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon winning probability combined ratio and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon, RB (1) + Watermelon + 1 in the combined value of winning probabilities and the ratio of the combined value of winning probabilities of watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet Do, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet When RB (1) + watermelon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon, RB (1) + Watermelon + 1 is selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs from the case where it is, the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' changes the player's expectation for winning the special role You may make it have.

  In this embodiment, in the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + The ratio of the sum of the winning probability of watermelon and BB (1) + in the sum of winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, BB () with a probability that the ratio of the sum of the winning probability of watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet is different. 1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon We win and draw combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, -By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line, and "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" The combination of the winning line with the combination of "" can change the player's expectation for winning a BB with higher advantage among BB and RB, but in the internal lottery BB ( 1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1 BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon in the combined value of winning probability of RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon won, When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, and BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet The winning combination of “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where it can be drawn into the screen, the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' Depending on the difference, it may be possible to change the player's expectation for winning the BB having higher advantage among BB and RB.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB when the set value is 1 to 3. (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 when the set value is 4-6 than the ratio of winning probability Sheets, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon Watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon won When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Priority is given to the case where a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, and +1 watermelon and 1 RB (1) + watermelon are selected. Different winning lines By controlling in this way, it is possible to infer whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player based on the difference in the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. In the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 when the set value is 1 to 3 Sheets, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon winning probability Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB ( 1) With the probability that the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon in the combined value of the winning probability of + watermelon + 1 sheet becomes high Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + Watermelon + 1 lottery will be performed, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet will be won When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "" can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon Enter the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that can be drawn into the line, the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' is aligned. Depending on the difference, it may be possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon , BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + watermelon +1 in the combined value of winning probabilities + BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon , RB (1) + watermelon winning probability of the sum of the set value is 1 to 3 or the setting value is 4 to 6 in the other case watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 Sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1 And when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB ( 2) + Watermelon, RB (1) + Watermelon is selected, and priority is given to the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. Different winning lines By controlled so, set value by the difference of the winning line combinations are aligned in "watermelon - - watermelon" may also be able to infer whether the advantageous setting value to the player.

  In addition, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon , BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 watermelon occupying the combined value of winning probability + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 than the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon ) + Watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1, BB (2) + Watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1, RB (1) + Watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 Watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + Su +1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon winning probability of the combined value of the watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB ( 1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon is selected, stop operation at the stop operation position that can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" into the winning line In the case of By controlling so that the winning line is different, it can be estimated whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player based on the difference of the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. You may do it.

  In addition, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon , BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + watermelon +1 in the combined value of winning probabilities + BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon , RB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece of watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, BB (1) + in the case where the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 rather than the ratio of the winning probability Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB ( ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability, the ratio of watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB ( 2) Lottery of + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1 ) + Watermelon is selected, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 Sheets, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon were selected, and the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" could be drawn into the winning line Align with priority when By controlling the prize line to be different, it is possible to infer whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player based on the difference of the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. Anyway.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether BB (1) or BB (2) is won, the set value is given to the player by the difference in the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. It is possible to infer whether or not the set value is advantageous, but in the internal lottery, when the set value is 1 to 3, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet , BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet when the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the combined value of winning probabilities of + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet , BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB ( ) + Watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery, and when the set value is 1 to 3, the ratio of the watermelon + 1 winning probability to the combined value of the watermelon, watermelon + 1 winning probability, and the set value is 4 to In the case of 6, watermelon, watermelon + 1 lottery with the probability that the ratio of the winning probability of watermelon + 1 to the combined value of winning probability of watermelon + 1 is the same, and watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon Is selected, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line The winning lines to be preferentially arranged may be controlled so as to be different, and in this way, it is confirmed that BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) is simultaneously won. It becomes possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player based on the difference in the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” as a condition.

  Also, in this embodiment, the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match is different between the case where the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 and the case where the setting is the setting 4 to 6. As long as at least one set value among a plurality of different set values and at least one other set value have different winning lines where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match.

  Further, in this embodiment, when BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) is won, among the winning lines L1 to L5, the BB having the higher advantage among the BB and RB In the winning line L4, L5, when the winning combination and the setting 4-6 having higher advantage among the setting 1-6 are set, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match. By making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easy, there is a high possibility that BB or RB has been won, and there is a high possibility that BB with higher advantage than RB has been won, and It is suggested that there is a high possibility that a high setting value is set, and when a watermelon wins, it is possible to give a sharpness to the player's expectation for being in an advantageous state Like However, when BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) is elected, among BB and RB, among BB and RB, BB with higher advantage is elected Alternatively, a winning line that is different from the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match in the case where at least one of the settings 1 to 6 of the settings 1 to 6 is set. Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that BB or RB is winning by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easier, BB with higher advantage than RB is winning This suggests that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility or the setting value with high advantage is set, and the possibility that the BB with higher advantage than RB is elected Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility that a highly advantageous setting value is set, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that BB is elected. On the one hand, even if an unfavorable possibility is suggested, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other.

  In addition, in the case where a BB with higher advantage is elected among BB and RB, BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) is won among the pay lines L1 to L5. Alternatively, a winning line that is different from the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match in the case where at least one of the settings 1 to 6 of the settings 1 to 6 is set. Even if there is no suggestion that BB with higher advantage than RB is likely to be won by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easier, BB or RB is won This means that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibilities or the setting values with a high degree of advantage is set, and the possibility or the advantage that the BB or RB is elected. Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility that a high set value is set, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a BB having a higher advantage than RB is elected. Therefore, even if a disadvantageous possibility is suggested on the one hand, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other hand.

  In addition, when settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages are set among the settings 1 to 6, BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) among the winning lines L1 to L5 is won. Or a winning line that is different from the winning line in which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match when at least one of BB and RB with higher advantage is elected. Even if there is no suggestion that there is a high possibility that a highly advantageous setting value is set by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easier, the possibility that BB or RB is elected Or, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that BB with higher advantage than RB is winning, and that BB or RB is winning or RB Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility that a BB with high advantage is elected, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a set value with high advantage is set. Therefore, even if a disadvantageous possibility is suggested on the one hand, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other hand.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B-B, in the internal lottery, BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white Cherry, RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB (4) + BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + net in the combined value (I + J) of the winning probability of white cherry BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet than the combined value (I) of the winning probability of cherry, BB (5) + white cherry BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 , BB (2) + watermelon + total value of winning probability (A + B + C) BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white cherry, RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB ( 4) A lottery of white cherry is being drawn.

  As a result, if you win at the same time as one of the cherries at the same time as a watermelon, you will win at the same time as a special role that you can expect to win more medals than BB, that is, RB. Since the ratio will increase, depending on whether the watermelon has won or one of the cherries has won, the player's expectation for the winning of the BB having the higher advantage of the BB and RB may be changed. it can.

  In addition, it is impossible to determine whether the BB is won or the RB is won from the winning small roles. The player's expectation for winning a high BB will not be impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B- (5), in the internal lottery, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, BB (3) + black cherry, BB (4) + Net cherry, BB (5) + white cherry, RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB (4) + white cherry's winning probability (I + J + K) BB (3) + Black cherry, BB (4) + net cherry, BB (5) + white cherry, RB (2) + black cherry, RB (3) + net cherry, RB (4) + white cherry winning probability combined value (I + J ) Than watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB ( 1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability combination BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) with the probability that the sum of the winning probability (A + B + C + D + E + F) ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, BB (3) + black cherry, BB ( 4) + Net cherry, BB (5) + White cherry, RB (2) + Black cherry, RB (3) + Net cherry, RB (4) + White cherry.

  As a result, the percentage of winning watermelons at the same time as the special role is higher than when one of the cherries wins, so either the watermelon won or one of the cherries won. The player's expectation for the special role can be changed.

  In addition, it is impossible to determine whether a special role is won from the winning small role, and even if one of the cherries wins, the player's expectation for winning the special role is impaired. There is no end.

  In addition, when developing a new model using a program for an existing model, if the payout number of the small role with the highest probability of winning simultaneously with the special role is large, the payout rate of medals increases when the probability is changed. However, in this embodiment, the probability that the watermelon with the lowest payout number and the special role will be selected at the same time is selected in the present example. However, since the other small roles (cherry) and special roles are set higher than the winning probability at the same time, even if the winning probability of the watermelon with the highest probability of simultaneous winning with the special role is greatly changed, the number of watermelons to be paid out Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal payout rate from being greatly affected. In particular, in this embodiment, the number of payouts associated with winning a watermelon is three or less required for setting the number of bets as a condition for starting one game, so the influence on the payout rate of medals is more limited. Can be a thing.

  Also, in this embodiment, for the small cherries, black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are determined for winning only at the stop positions of the right reels. The degree of freedom of the stop position of the reel (left reel, middle reel) that is not directly related to the winning determination is higher than that of the small role to be played. In this embodiment, black cherries, net cherries, white cherries, that is, a small role that is determined whether or not a winning combination is determined only by the stop position of the right reel and a special role are won simultaneously, so that the stop positions of all reels Compared to the case where a small role that needs to draw the target symbol is won at the same time, it is possible to easily design a chance eye or reach eye that is derived when one of the cherries wins.

  Also, in this embodiment, as described later, when the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is missed, the RT transition combination is won. Control to align the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 at a higher rate than L4 and L5, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 If the water is picked up and the watermelon is missed, control is performed to align the RT transition role with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. Even so, it is possible to determine the difference between the possibility of winning BB or RB, the possibility of winning BB with higher advantage than RB, and the possibility of setting a value with higher advantage. But The ratio that the T transition combination is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and the ratio that the RT transition combination is aligned with the L4 and L5 is watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon When you win and lose a watermelon, and when you lose watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1 In this way, if the watermelon wins, the possibility that BB or RB is won, BB with higher advantage than RB wins The difference between the possibility of setting and a setting value with a high degree of advantage can be discriminated. On the other hand, if a watermelon is missed, the possibility that BB or RB is elected is more advantageous than RB Possibility that BB with high degree is elected Since the high setting value Advantageous degree it becomes impossible to determine the difference in potential that is set, it is possible to increase the interest in the case of performing a game without Torikobosa watermelon.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a small role notification effect for notifying that when a small role is won. The small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate when the special role is won than when the special role is not won, so the small role announcement production is executed and the special role is won. This suggests the possibility of doing so.

  In addition, the small role notification effect includes a first small role notification effect and a second small role notification effect, and the sub CPU 91a selects one of the selected small type notification effects when executing the small role notification effect. Perform small role announcement production. At this time, when the special role is won, the ratio of the second small role notification effect being selected is higher than when the special role is not won, so the second small role notification effect is executed. Then, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when the first small role notification effect is executed.

  In addition, since the ratio of the second small role announcement effect is higher when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than when the watermelon is elected alone, the watermelon BB or RB suggested by a winning line with a combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" at the time of winning, possibility of winning BB with high RB advantage, possibility of high advantage The possibility that the set value has been set and the type of the small role announcement effect are linked. Depending on the display mode and effect of these reels, BB or RB winning, BB winning higher than RB, winning It is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that a high set value is set.

  Further, when executing the small role notification effect, the sub CPU 91a selects the start timing, and starts the small role notification effect from the selected timing. There are four start timings at the start of the game, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. When the special role is won, the ratio at which the third stop is selected is Since the ratio decreases in the order of the second stop, the first stop, and the start of the game, it is likely that the player is most likely to win the special role when starting from the third stop. It is suggested that the possibility decreases in the order of the third stop, the second stop, and the first stop.

  Also, the ratio of the third stop and the second stop is higher when the watermelon and one are selected at the same time than when the watermelon is won alone among the watermelon and one. , BB or RB suggested by the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” at the time of winning the watermelon, the possibility of winning the BB with high RB advantage, the advantage The possibility that a high set value is set and the start timing of the small role announcement effect are linked, and BB or RB wins depending on the display mode of these reels and the start timing of the effect, BB having a higher advantage than RB It is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that the winning and the setting value having a high degree of advantage are set.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you miss any part, if you do not win any of the winning combinations, you can change the stop mode of the reel by stopping the specific stop mode that will not stop, but stop at the same timing There is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when a specific combination is missed by performing an operation, and there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (3) + watermelon are selected, and the stop operation is not performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line. If it is made, a combination of “watermelon / orange-watermelon / orange-watermelon / orange” excluding “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” (hereinafter referred to as “RT transition role”) is more than the winning lines L4, L5. Priority is given to L2 and L3, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected. When the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line, the winning line L4, L2 is assigned to the RT transition role rather than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. And performs a control to align in preference to.

  Therefore, even if watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is elected, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2 ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet even when winning, the stop operation was made at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line In some cases, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” will be on the winning line, but if watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon are won, In other words, if only one watermelon is elected and loses watermelon alone, there is a high possibility that the RT transition role will be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3, and watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB ( ) + Watermelon + 1 and RB (1) + watermelon + 1 is winning, that is, if both watermelons and 1 water is winning at the same time, and the watermelon is missed, the RT transition role will receive the winning lines L4, L5 There is a high possibility that

  As a result, when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is dropped, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) Reel stop mode when watermelon is dropped because the winning line where RT transition is easy to match is different between when + watermelon + 1 and RB (1) + watermelon + 1 are selected and the watermelon is dropped Can be diversified.

  In addition, RT transition role is that watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon won and dropped watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 Sheets, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are controlled to be aligned to any winning line on condition that the watermelon is missed and won, or a combination of these roles If no is selected, the RT transition combination is not arranged in any winning line. For this reason, the possibility of winning BB or RB is surely suggested by having the RT transition combination in any winning line.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time, BB (1) and BB (2 ) Or RB (1), that is, the percentage of winning at the same time as the special role increases, so that the winning line with the RT transition role is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the special role. Furthermore, even if the winning line with the RT transition combination is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, it is suggested that the special combination may be won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been elected from a winning line with RT transitional roles, and a special role has been elected regardless of which winning line the RT transitional role is aligned with. The player's expectation for the game will not be lost.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time, more than BB, that is, RB, than the case where the watermelon is won alone. Since the ratio of winning simultaneously with special roles that can be expected to win medals will increase, the winning line with RT transitioning roles is the winning lines L1, L2, L3, or the winning lines L4, L5. Or the like, it is possible to give a change to the player's expectation for winning a BB having a higher advantage among BB and RB. Furthermore, it is suggested that the BB or RB may have been won regardless of whether the winning line with the RT transition combination is the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5. , It is impossible to determine whether the BB is won or the RB is won from the winning line with the RT transition combination. Even if the RT transition combination is aligned with any winning line, BB and The player's expectation for winning a BB with higher advantage among RBs is not impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the setting values 4 to 6 are set when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected simultaneously rather than the case where the watermelon is elected at the same time. That is, since the ratio of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than when the settings 1 to 3 are set is increased, the winning lines having the RT transition combination are the winning lines L1, L2, Whether the set value is a set value advantageous to the player or not can be inferred based on whether it is L3 or the pay lines L4 and L5. Further, it is impossible to determine whether the setting values 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 are set as the set values from the winning line in which the RT transition combination is arranged. Even when the winning lines are aligned, the player's expectation that settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set is not impaired.

  In this embodiment, the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon won and the watermelon was dropped, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1, and when the watermelon is missed, the winning line where the RT transition role is easy to change is changed, When RT transition combination 1 and RT transition combination 2 with different display modes are defined, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is won and watermelon is dropped +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1 It may be changed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is elected and the watermelon is overtaken, the RT transition combination is received from the winning lines L4 and L5. A higher percentage of winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are controlled, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won When the watermelon is missed, the RT transition role is controlled to be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, but the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, When BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is elected and watermelon is missed, the RT transition role is controlled only to the winning lines L1, L2, L3, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, B (2) + +1 Like watermelon, when RB (1) + +1 Like Watermelon has missed the watermelon was elected, may perform the control, which adjusts the RT transition role only pay line L4, L5.

  Also, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is won and watermelon is dropped, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1, RB (1) + watermelon +1 Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet won and lost watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, When BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon is elected and watermelon is missed, RT transition role can be easily derived to different winning lines, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 , BB (2) + watermelon +1 , RB (1) + watermelon won and watermelon was missed, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet won and watermelon In case you missed it, it will be easier to derive the RT transition role in different winning lines, or watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 will win If you miss a watermelon + one, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1) + watermelon will win the different winning lines An RT transition combination may be easily derived.

  Also, in this embodiment, the ratio of winning at the same time as the special role is higher in the case where the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time than in the case where the watermelon is won alone in the watermelon and one piece. Therefore, BB or RB wins, BB wins with high RB wins, wins depending on whether the winning line with RT transitions is win lines L1, L2, L3 or win lines L4, L5 The player's expectation level for setting a high setting value is changed. For example, when the RT transition combination is aligned with any winning line, the transition to RT described later is performed. In addition, when the RT transition combination is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, the first RT is shifted, and when the RT transition combination is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5, the first RT is advantageous ( RT termination conditions, re-playing role It may be configured to shift to a second RT having a different winning probability, presence / absence notification type or notification ratio of winning combination, etc., and when such a configuration is adopted, when a watermelon is missed, the display mode of the reel In addition to diversification, even in the display mode in which the same RT transition role is aligned on the winning line, when watermelon is elected alone, there is a possibility of transitioning RT and watermelon +1 The advantage can be changed with RT which may shift when a watermelon is missed when a sheet is won.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you missed a certain role, there is something that suggests that you will miss a specific role by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop if no role is elected, but when you miss a specific role If the player does not know the specific stopping mode to be stopped, he cannot know that he / she has missed the elected special role, and in such a case, he simply missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether or not

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet , RB (1) + watermelon + 1 win, stop operation that can not pull "watermelon" to the winning line at the first stop (when any reel is stopped while all reels are changing) When the stop operation is performed at the position, control is performed to draw “orange” into one of the winning lines, and the remaining reels stop at the stop operation position where “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line where “orange” has stopped. When an operation is performed, control is performed to draw “watermelon” into the winning line where “orange” is stopped. If the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where neither “watermelon” nor “orange” can be drawn into the winning line at the time of the first stop, “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7” is set to the winning line. In the remaining reels, a stop operation was performed at a stop operation position where “watermelon” could be drawn into the winning line where “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7” was stopped. In this case, control is performed to draw “watermelon” into the stopped winning line of “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7”.

  Also, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1 ) + Watermelon + 1 was won, and “Watermelon” stopped on one of the winning lines at the time of the first stop, but at the time of the second stop (the operation to stop one of the reels was made while any two reels were changing) ) At the second stop time, the winning line where “watermelon” is stopped at the time of the second stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the first stop, the winning line where “watermelon” was stopped at the first stop at the time of the third stop (when one of the reels was changing and the last reel was stopped) was stopped. Stop operation at the stop operation position retractable for "watermelon" is when done, and performs a control to draw "watermelon" in pay lines stopped in "watermelon" during a first stop.

  That is, even if the watermelon is dropped out at the time of the first stop or the second stop, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, the “watermelon-watermelon- Control to align a part of the combination of “watermelon” to the winning line is performed.

  Therefore, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB ( 1) Even if + watermelon + 1 is selected and the watermelon is missed during the first stop or the second stop, the remaining reels will be stopped at the stop operation position where “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. In this case, since a part of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning line, even if the watermelon is dropped out at the first stop or the second stop, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” Whether or not a watermelon has been missed can be easily determined based on whether or not a part of the combination is aligned with the winning line.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 Sheet, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 is won, and when the watermelon is missed at the first stop and at the second stop, it becomes an index symbol (in the case of being missed at the first stop, "orange", If “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7” is missed at the second stop, “watermelon stopped at the first stop” is regarded as the stop position where “watermelon” has stopped, and the watermelon has been missed. Stop control is performed using the stop control table used when there is not. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” on the winning line, and a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” when a watermelon is dropped during the first stop or the second stop Since there is no need to prepare a separate stop control table for stopping a part of the winning line on the winning line, a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be used when a watermelon is dropped during the first stop or the second stop. The storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced even when control is performed to align a part of the winning line.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a includes watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet. When RB (1) + watermelon + 1 is won, it is preferable to notify that the watermelon has been won or not, at least until the second stop. As a result, if the watermelon has been elected at the time of the first stop or the second stop, the fact that the watermelon has been won, or the possibility of that being announced, the “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels. A stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not a watermelon has been dropped depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning line. Thus, in the case where there are a plurality of combinations that do not have stop operation positions that can be pulled in simultaneously, that is, there are a plurality of combinations that miss one when aiming at one, it is possible to accurately determine which combination has been missed.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a has the same lottery probabilities for the special role and the small role after the BB, but the winning probabilities for the replay (1) and the replay (2) are both higher than the normal gaming state. Replay time (1) (RT (1)) with a high probability and a medal payout rate per game (winning probability of the target role × total number of payouts / number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1 ) To control. Then, RT (1) does not win any special role, and replay (2) does not win and reaches the specified number of games (20 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. Either special winning combination is won or the replay (2) wins and the process proceeds to RT (2) described later.

  In addition, when the replay (2) wins in the normal gaming state, RT (1), and RT (3), which will be described later, the special role (if none of the special roles have been carried over) and the small role draw probability are normal Replay time that is the same as the gaming state, but the winning probability of replay (1) is higher than that of the normal gaming state and RT (1), and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1) (2) Control to (RT (2)). Then, RT (2) does not win any special role, reaches any specified game number (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any cherries, or before reaching the specified game number. It ends with either winning a special role or winning one of the cherries. Also, if any special role is won during RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (2) will not end until the winning special role wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after BB ends, RT (1) is controlled so that the winning probability of replay (2), which becomes a trigger for transition to RT (2), is increased, and RT (1) It is possible to enhance the player's expectation to shift to RT (2) by being controlled by the above.

  In RT (2), the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1), the number of predetermined games as the end condition is larger than RT (1), and more medals than RT (1). Therefore, by controlling to RT (1), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation to shift to RT (2).

  Also, RT (1) and RT (2) both have an expected increase rate of medals per game exceeding 1, and an increase in medals can be expected only by being controlled by RT (1). By moving to 2), further increase in medals can be expected.

  In addition, RT (2) will be special if any special role is won after the start of RT (2) and before the specified number of games is reached, if the selected special role does not win. RT (2) will not end with the winning of and if the selected special combination is not awarded, it will be possible to continue control to RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if a special role is won in 2), if the selected special role is not won, RT (2) can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, giving the player a sense of loss. There is no end.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  If any cherry wins during RT (2), RT (2) will end even if the specified number of games has not been reached since the start of RT (2) unless any special role is won However, only one black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that have black cherry, black cherries, white cherry, and white cherries are placed on the right reel. Because there are no black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry combinations, you can avoid the combination of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry if you do not perform a stop operation within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry can be combined. In addition, all the reels are arranged with four or more spaces for special roles, and there is a stop operation position where the special symbols cannot be drawn. Therefore, it can be avoided that a combination of special auditors are aligned. As a result, even if any cherries or special roles are elected by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of black cherries, net cherries, white cherries, or special roles, these winning cherries It can be avoided that the special role is won and RT (2) ends.

  As a result, even if any cherry or special role is won after the start of RT (2), the player performs a stop operation at an operation procedure that avoids winning, that is, at a timing outside the drawing range of the cherry or special role. Since RT (2) can be continued by performing, that is, a player's technical intervention, the interest associated with RT (2) can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, for each area of the right reel, there is an area where the “black cherry”, “net cherry” or “white cherry” symbols are drawn on one of the winning lines. There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, so if any cherry is selected during RT (2), it is not possible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known. Yes, you will miss the winning cherries with a probability of 2/3, but if the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role has been won, RT (2 ) Will end. As a result, the operation procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of cherry, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of falls, so the player guesses which type of cherry was won However, whether or not RT (2) is continued is determined depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are practically small roles with six payouts, but in order to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. It is preferable that it is a small role that involves paying out 3 or less medals, which is necessary for the number of medals, and in this way, winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries in order to continue RT (2) Even if the game is avoided, the player will not suffer a great disadvantage, and the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry will not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1.

  Black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries may be won at the same time as BB (3), BB (4), and BB (5). Even if the end condition of RT (2) is satisfied, there is a possibility that BB is won at the same time. Therefore, even if the end condition of RT (2) is satisfied, it can be expected that BB is won.

  Also, if any special role is won in RT (2), even if one of the cherries wins, if one of the cherries wins if the selected special role is not won, Since RT (2) will not end until the specified number of games is reached, during this period, if any cherry wins, the winning cherries will be awarded to win the special role. Since more medals can be earned compared to, the number of medals that can be earned afterwards when compared to when not winning, if any special role is won during RT (2) Can be increased.

  The sub CPU 91a performs the RT (2) effect at RT (2). In RT (2), when a fallen role (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is elected during RT (2), a faller winning notification that informs that the fallen role has been won, during RT (2) When a fallen combination (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is won, a fallen role type notification for notifying the type of the fallen combination (type of the fallen role specified from the internal winning flag) is included.

  The falling role type notification indicates that the black cherry has been won, the net cherry has been won, the white cherry has been won, the color or pattern that suggests that win (black, black to indicate that the black cherry has been won, When the net cherry indicates that it has been won, it is indicated by shading, and when the white cherry indicates that it has been won, white) is notified, thereby informing the type of the falling role.

  Note that the fallen role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the fallen role, and the type of the fallen role itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of fallen role, It may be notified by displaying an image or the like suggesting the type on the liquid crystal display 51, or by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the falling role (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the falling role and stands out from the constituent symbol of the falling role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  When the sub CPU 91a executes the falling role notification lottery for determining whether or not to perform the falling role type notification during the BB and RT (1) (2) and wins the falling role notification lottery, The number of falling combination notifications is determined, and the determined number of falling combination notifications is set in the RAM 91c. In addition, when the winning combination lottery is won while the number of falling combination notifications remains in the RAM 91c, the newly determined number of falling combination notifications is added to the number of falling combination notifications remaining in the RAM 91c. Then, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, it is determined whether or not the falling combination notification count remains, and the falling combination notification count remains. If there is, the falling role type notification corresponding to the winning cherry is executed. In other words, when a black cherry is won, a falling role type notification that notifies black that indicates the winning of black cherry is executed, and when a net cherry is won, a falling role that notifies of the shading that indicates the winning of net cherry is notified. The type notification is executed, and when the white cherry is won, the falling role type notification for notifying the white indicating the winning of the white cherry is executed. In addition, when any special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, the number of falling combination notification is decremented by one every time the falling combination type notification is executed once. Therefore, when any of the cherries wins within the range in which the falling combination notification count remains, the falling combination type notification is executed. In addition, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), when there is no remaining falling combination notification count, the falling combination winning notification is executed when any falling combination is won.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, if any cherry wins in a state where no special combination is won in RT (2), it is before the specified number of games is reached from the start of RT (2). RT (2) will end, but as mentioned above, the black reel, net cherry, and white cherry that make up the black cherry, black net, and white cherry symbols. Since it cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, if any cherry is selected in the state where no special role is won in RT (2), the cherry is intentionally unclear. It is impossible to remove the cherries, and the winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3, but the winning cherries will win with a probability of 1/3, and RT (2) will end. It becomes Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when any special combination is not won in RT (2), when any of the cherries wins, if the fallen combination type notification is executed, the player is notified of the color or pattern notified. It is possible to recognize which combination of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries has been won by the color or pattern suggested by the black cherry, net cherries, and white cherries. It is possible to specify a stop operation position where the “black cherry” symbol, the “net cherry” symbol, and the “white cherry” symbol are not intentionally stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), if any cherry is won, the fallen combination type notification is executed, so that the player is notified of the color or The pattern makes it possible to recognize the type of cherry that has been won, and as a result, it is possible to know the operating procedure for avoiding winning of a cherry that may have been won, and the player deliberately picks the winning cherry. By spilling, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) accompanying the winning of the cherry and continue RT (2).

  In addition, the player does not always have to practice an operation procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination in RT (2), and an operating procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination is performed only when the falling combination type notification is executed. Since it only has to be performed, the burden on the player in RT (2) can be reduced.

  Moreover, since the falling combination type notification is executed when the number of falling combination notifications remains, the number of games that RT (2) continues can be greatly varied depending on the number of falling combination notifications, so RT (2). The interest that accompanies can be further enhanced. In the present embodiment, the number of games continued by RT (2) is changed by executing the falling combination type notification when the number of falling combination notifications remains, but at the time of winning the falling combination The number of games that RT (2) continues may be varied by changing the execution probability of the falling combination type notification.

  Also, as described above, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same cherries and “7” symbol at the same time on the right reel. By performing the stop operation of the right reel, the winning color or pattern cherry is not won, and the end of RT (2) can be avoided. That is, in the falling role type notification, in addition to notifying the type of the falling role won by the suggested color or pattern, the position serving as an index when avoiding winning of the falling role is also notified. ing.

  In the present embodiment, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins in the state where any special role is won in RT (2), so either one in RT (2) After winning the special role, you can win more medals by winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. However, as mentioned above, the right reel of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries Since the “Black Cherry”, “Net Cherry” and “White Cherry” designs cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, these black cherries, It is impossible to intentionally win net cherries or white cherries. If you win these roles, you can win with a probability of 1/3, but with a probability of 2/3. Resulting in spilled.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a notifies that the special combination is won at a rate of 1/2 when any special combination is won during RT (2), and any special combination is carried over. When one of the cherries wins in a state where the winning of the special role is notified, the falling role type notification is executed regardless of whether or not the number of falling role notifications remains. Yes. For this reason, when any special combination is elected in RT (2) and the special combination is notified, either black cherry, net cherry or white cherry is selected In addition, it is possible to recognize the winning combination, and it is possible to win all the winning black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. In addition, even if the special role is elected, in the state where the fact is not notified, it is controlled in the same manner as the state where the special role is not elected, that is, if the number of falling combination notices remains If the falling combination type notification is executed and if the number of falling combination notifications does not remain, the falling combination winning notification is executed when any of the falling combinations is won, so RT (2 ), The player can always have a sense of expectation for winning the special role even if the special role is not notified.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a has a combination of “watermelon / orange-watermelon / orange-watermelon / orange” aligned in any winning line in the normal gaming state, that is, when the watermelon has won, or the RT transition role When one of the winning lines is aligned, the lottery probability of the special role, small role, and replay (2) is the same as the normal gaming state, but the winning probability of the replay (1) is higher than the normal gaming state ( In the present embodiment, the replay time (3) (RT (3)) in which the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is about 1/2) and the medal payout rate per game is 1 or less. To control. Then, RT (3) will not win any special role and will not win replay (2) and will reach the specified number of games (5 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. Either special role is won and the process proceeds to RT (4), which will be described later, or replay (2) wins and the process proceeds to RT (2).

  In addition, when one of BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) wins in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3), the draw probability of the small role and replay (2) is Replay time that is the same as the normal game state, but the replay (1) win probability is higher than the normal game state (same as RT (3)), and the medal payout rate per game is 1 or less (4) Control to (RT (4)). Then, RT (4) ends when the winning special combination wins and shifts to BB or RB. Note that RT (4) has no specified number of games, and once it has shifted, it continues until the special combination wins.

  In this way, when one of BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3), In addition to the transition to RT (4), which increases the probability of winning, if a re-playing role and a special role are won at the same time, the combination of symbols that make up the re-playing role will be the winning line rather than the combination of symbols that make up the special role Is controlled preferentially, and even if a special role is elected, it is difficult to match the combinations of symbols that make up the special role, and it is determined whether or not the special role is won. This makes it difficult to effectively maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  In addition, when BB (3) to (5) is won or when RB (2) to (4) is won, RT (4) is not transferred and RB (1) is won. The combined probability of the winning probabilities of BB (1) and BB (2) is higher than the probability, and the winning frequency of the re-player is increased, so that the player's expectation for winning of BB or RB can be enhanced, The player's expectation for winning BB with higher value than RB can be raised.

  In this embodiment, even if RB (1) is won, the process moves to RT (4). However, if BB is won, the process moves to RT (4), and even if RB wins, RT (4 ) May not be transferred, and in such a configuration, the player's expectation for winning a BB having a higher value than RB can be effectively enhanced.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a combination of watermelons or RT transitions that suggest the possibility of winning a special role in the normal gaming state is aligned with any winning line, a maximum of five games can be obtained from the normal gaming state. However, RT (3) or RT (4) is triggered by the combination of watermelons or RT transitions on any winning line. ), Even if a special role has been won, it is difficult to find a combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether the special role has been won. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation for the possibility of winning the special role suggested by being in any winning line.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the special role has been won and the single-shot effect that ends in only one game as an effect indicating the possibility of winning the special role. A continuous effect that leads the effect result to be shown is executed.

  The continuous production further includes a continuous production 1, a continuous production 2 and a continuous production 3 with different production modes, and the sub CPU 91a includes a case where any special role is won (including a case where a small role is simultaneously won). ), Or when one of the watermelons, watermelons + one, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is elected, or when none of the roles are elected (losing), these single effects, continuous effects 1 -3 are selected based on the selection rate determined according to the result of the internal lottery, and when one of the effects is selected, the selected effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1 ) + Watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece, watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, that is, continuous only when the combination of watermelon or RT transition can be derived to any winning line An effect is selected, and in other cases, a continuous effect is not selected, and only a single effect is selected.

  As described above, when any of BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the transition to RT (4) where the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than that in the normal gaming state. In addition, when a combination of watermelons or RT transitions that suggest the possibility of winning a special role in the normal gaming state is aligned with any of the winning lines, up to 5 games can be re-played than the normal gaming state. In the game where BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) win, the watermelon is always won at the same time, and the combination of watermelons or Since it is possible to align the RT transition combination with any winning line, the combination of watermelons or RT transition combination with either winning line is triggered by RT (3) or After shifting to RT (4), difficult matching combinations of symbols special role even constitute its special role also be elected, it is difficult to determine special role is whether winning.

  In this embodiment, the continuous production is selected only when the combination of watermelons or RT transition combination can be derived to any winning line, and the combination of watermelons or RT transition combination is selected to any winning line. Since the continuous performance is executed when it is derived, it is difficult to determine whether or not the special role has been won in the subsequent continuous performance, so the player's expectation for the special role winning until the end of the continuous performance A feeling can be maintained effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, the left reel cannot simultaneously aim at “black 7” constituting BB (1) and RB (1) and “white 7” constituting BB (2). Cannot simultaneously target “Black 7” constituting BB (1) and “White 7” constituting BB (2) and RB (1). In other words, BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) have different operating procedures for winning, so that each BB (1), BB ( 2) It cannot be determined that neither RB (1) is won.

  In the present embodiment, among special roles whose possibility of winning due to the continuous performance is suggested, X is the number of special roles that do not overlap each other with the operation procedure for winning, and the winning probability of the re-playing role during the continuous performance Is Y, and the number of continuous games in the continuous production is Z, the number of continuous games in the continuous production is determined so that Z <X + Y · Z is established. In this embodiment, as described above, X = 3 (BB (1), BB (2), RB (1)), and BB (1), BB (2), and RB (1) are elected continuously. When an effect is executed, the process always shifts to RT (4), and Y = 1/2. Therefore, in order to satisfy Z <X + Y · Z, Z must be a value less than 6. Yes, continuous production continues over the largest game.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the number of games (Y · Z) expected to be won for re-playing roles that make it difficult to win special roles during continuous performances, and the possibility of winning through continuous performances are suggested. The number of special roles that do not overlap each other in the procedure for winning a prize, that is, the number of games necessary to determine whether any special role is won is added. Since the continuous production is executed for a smaller number of games than the value obtained, it is difficult to reliably determine whether or not the special role suggested by the continuous production is won until the continuous production is finished. In addition to maintaining the player's expectation for winning the special role until the end of the continuous performance, taking into account the winning probability of the re-playing role that makes it difficult to win the special role during the continuous performance Continuous production For over-time number is determined, without the operation procedure of the order to winning is to increase the number of different special auditors, respectively, it is possible to increase the number of continuation game of continuous production more than that. In particular, in this embodiment, since the RT is controlled with a high probability of winning a re-playing role during the continuous performance, it is possible to greatly increase the number of continuous games in the continuous performance without increasing the types of special roles. Yes.

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of winning probabilities for a replay player during a period in which the continuous effect is executed is provided, the continuous game number of the continuous effect is Z, and the winning probability of the replay player in the gaming state in which the continuous effect is executed is The same effect can be obtained if Y and Z <X + Y · Z are satisfied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, RB (1 ) + Watermelon, RB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece, watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, that is, continuous only when the combination of watermelon or RT transition can be derived to any winning line When the production is selected, otherwise, only the single production is selected, and when BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are elected as described above, reach Eyes and chance eyes are likely to appear, but when BB (1) (2) and RB (1) are elected, BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are elected Reach eyes and chance eyes are less likely to appear When BB (3) to (5) and RB (2) to (4) are elected, that is, when only a single effect is executed, reach eyes and chance eyes are likely to appear and immediately become special roles. While it is possible to detect whether or not the winner has been won, if the BB (1), BB (2) or RB (1) wins and the continuous performance is executed, reach eyes or chance eyes will appear. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not a special role has been won even if a reach or chance is not derived during execution of a continuous performance. A player's expectation for winning can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, watermelon Continuous production 2 is selected only when +1 watermelon is selected, and BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon Since the continuous production 3 is selected only when +1 is won, and the continuous production 2 and the continuous production 3 are not selected in the cases other than the above, even if it is the same continuous production When the continuous production 2 is executed and the special role is finally won, the winning of the BB more advantageous than the RB is confirmed, and when the continuous production 3 is executed, the result of the production is not waited. Because BB winning is confirmed, BB is different depending on the difference It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and (b)-(1), when BB (1) to (5) or RB (1) to (4) is won, a single effect is produced. From the combined probability (M1 + M2 + N1 + P1) of the probability that the continuous effect is selected when the combined probability (L1 + L2 + L3 + L4) of the selected probability is the winning combination of BB (1) to (5) or RB (1) to (4) Is also expensive. That is, when BB (1) to (5) or RB (1) to (4) is elected, the rate at which the single effect is executed is higher than the continuous effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and (b)-(2), RBs (1) to (4) are elected and occupy the combined probability (L3 + L4 + M2) of the probability that a single effect or a continuous effect is selected. The ratio of the combined probability (L3 + L4) of the probability that RB (1) to (4) is elected and the single effect is selected, and BB (1) to (5) is elected and the single effect or the continuous effect is selected. BB (1) to (5) occupying the combined probability (L1 + L2 + M1 + N1 + P1) of the probability is won, and is higher than the ratio of the combined probability (L1 + L2) of the probability that the single performance is selected.

  For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and (b)-(3), BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) are elected and the probability of the single effect is selected. The ratio of the combined probabilities (R3, L3 + R4, L4) of the probability that RB (1) to (4) occupying the combined probabilities (R1, L1 + R2, L2 + R3, L3 + R4, L4) is won and the single performance is selected is the internal lottery The combined probability (R3 + R4) of the probability that RB (1) to (4) will win in the internal lottery in the combined probability (R1 + R2 + R3 + R4) of the probability that BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) will win ) Ratio is higher. That is, when the single production is executed, the ratio of the ratio of BB winning and the ratio of RB winning in the total ratio of the ratio of RB winning is the BB, RB in the actual internal lottery. It becomes higher than the ratio of the winning probability of RB in the composite probability.

  In this way, when the single production is executed, the RB wins at a ratio higher than the ratio of the RB winning probability in the combined probability of BB and RB in the actual internal lottery, so the production is a single production. It can be estimated whether there is a high possibility of winning RB among BB and RB depending on whether there is a continuous performance.

  Also, when the BB or RB is won, the frequency of the single effect is higher than that of the continuous effect, and when the single effect is executed, the BB can be expected to win relatively. Therefore, when a single production effect is executed, if the BB is won, the player can be expected to be more advantageous than the RB. The interest in such a case can be enhanced effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the sum of the probabilities that a single effect or a continuous effect is selected when BB (1) to (5) are won. The ratio of the combined probability (M1 + N1 + P1) of the probability that continuous production is selected when BB (1) to (5) occupying the probability (L1 + L2 + M1 + N1 + P1) is won, when RB (1) to (4) is won RB (1) to (4) occupying the combined probability (L3 + L4 + M2) of the probability of selecting the effect or the continuous effect is higher than the ratio of the combined probability (M2) of the probability that the continuous effect is selected.

  For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and (b)-(5), BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) are won and the probability that the continuous effect is selected. The ratio of the combined probability (R1 · M1 + R1 · N1 + R1 · P1) of the probability that BB (1) to (5) occupying the combined probability (R1 · M1 + R1 · N1 + R1 · P1 + R3 · M2) is won and the continuous performance is selected is The combined probability of the probability that BB (1) to (5) wins in the internal lottery in the combined probability of the probability that BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) win in the internal lottery (R1 + R2 + R3 + R4) It is higher than the ratio of (R1 + R1). That is, the ratio of the probability that BB is won in the combined probability of the probability that BB is won and the probability that RB is won when the continuous performance is executed is the ratio of BB and RB in the actual internal lottery. It becomes higher than the ratio of the winning probability of BB in the composite probability.

  In this way, when the continuous production is executed, the BB wins at a ratio higher than the ratio of the winning probability of BB in the combined probability of BB and RB in the actual internal lottery. It can be estimated whether there is a high possibility of winning BB among BB and RB depending on whether there is a continuous performance.

  In addition, when a continuous effect that is continued over a plurality of games is executed, the ratio of winning BBs that are advantageous to the player out of BB and RB is higher than when a single effect that ends in one game is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the presentation is postponed over a plurality of games, BB winning can be expected, so that the player's expectation can be effectively maintained.

  The continuous effects 1 to 3 are further composed of two types of continuous effects A and B, and the sub CPU 91a further selects any of the continuous effects A and B when any of the continuous effects 1 to 3 is selected. . At this time, the sub CPU 91a selects one of the continuous effects A and B at a different rate according to the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, in the continuous effect A, the setting values are in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, that is, the setting values are higher (setting values advantageous to the player). It is selected at a high rate, and the continuous performance B is selected at a higher rate as the setting values are in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; It has become. Further, in the situation where the game history as a result of the past game is disadvantageous for the player, the continuous performance A is selected at a higher rate than the situation where the game history is advantageous for the player. The game history is, for example, the number of games from the previous BB or RB, the payout rate of medals in a certain period, the number of winnings of special roles, etc. The disadvantageous situation for the player is, for example, There are situations where the number of games from BB or RB exceeds the standard number of games, the payout rate of medals for a certain period is below the standard payout rate, and the number of winnings for special roles is below the standard number of times .

  Further, after selecting either one of the continuous effects A and B, the sub CPU 91a executes the result notification effect for a certain period of time, and finally, whether the continuous effect A is selected or the continuous effect B is selected. The result notification shown is performed. When the continuous effect B is selected, the continuous effect B is executed after the result notification. On the other hand, when the continuous effect A is selected, the bet of the next game is performed after the result notification. The subgame is executed during the period until the number is set, and either one of the continuous effects A or B is executed according to the result. In addition, after selecting either one of the continuous effects A and B, before a certain time elapses, that is, before the result notification, the bet number setting operation and the credit or bet number adjustment operation are performed, and the result notification effect is in progress. In the case of being canceled at, regardless of which of the continuous effects A and B is selected, the result notification indicating that the continuous effect B is selected is performed, and then the continuous effect B is executed.

  The sub game includes a pseudo reel game and a touch game, and the player can select one of them.

  The pseudo reel game is a game in which the pseudo reel displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is pushed. The sub CPU 91a first displays the three pseudo reels in a stopped state on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 in the pseudo reel game. In this state, when the operation of the start switch 7 is determined based on the operation detection command, the pseudo reel is changed. After the change, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is determined based on the operation detection command, thereby corresponding pseudo reel. And the display result is derived. When the display results are derived for all the pseudo reels, it is determined whether or not a specific symbol combination (for example, chance-chance-chance) has been prepared. Executes the continuous effect A, and executes the continuous effect B when the combination of specific symbols is not complete.

  Further, after the pseudo reel game is started, the sub CPU 91a does not operate the start switch 7 or operates the start switch 7, but does not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and does not operate the pseudo reel game. Even if the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed in the middle of the game and the pseudo reel game is stopped, the continuous effect B is performed as in the case where a specific symbol combination is not prepared in the pseudo reel game. Execute.

  The touch game is a game in which a player obtains a score by operating the touch panel according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the sub CPU 91a receives the score obtained in the sub game at the end of the sub game. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the specified value. If the value is equal to or greater than the specified value, the continuous effect A is executed.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a cancels the touch game when the touch game is finished without any touch panel operation in the touch game or when the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed before the touch game is finished. Even if the touch game score is less than the specified value, the continuous effect B is executed.

  In the continuous performance A, one of the characters a to e is the main character. When the sub CPU 91a executes the continuous performance A, the sub CPU 91a performs a character selection lottery and selects any one of the characters a to e as the main character. At this time, the sub CPU 91a selects any of the characters a to e at different ratios according to the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18B, the character a has a higher set value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, that is, a higher set value (a set value advantageous to the player). The character b is selected at a higher rate when the set value is even than the odd number, and the character c is selected at a higher rate when the set value is odd than when the set value is odd. d is selected only when the setting value is 6, that is, the highest setting (the most advantageous setting for the player), and the character e is set in the order of the setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; The lower the value (a setting value that is disadvantageous for the player), the higher the ratio is selected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the ratio in which the character a and the character e are main characters in the continuous performance A differs according to the set value, and the setting that is advantageous for the player if the ratio of the character a is high and the ratio of the character e is low. If the ratio of the character e is high and the ratio of the character a is low, there is a high possibility that the setting value is disadvantageous for the player. For this reason, it becomes possible to guess a setting value from the frequency in which the character a and the character b become the main characters in the continuous performance A.

  In the conventional slot machine, an effect that suggests a set value is performed at the time of winning a BB. Generally, the lower the set value, the lower the appearance rate of the BB. Thus, the set value is triggered by the BB win. If the BB is not awarded for a while, the player decides that the set value is low before suggesting the set value and stops the game. In spite of having a function that suggests a set value, it is difficult to sufficiently maintain the player's willingness to continue the game in order to guess the set value.

  On the other hand, in this example, it is suggested that when a combination of watermelons or RT transition combination is arranged in any winning line, that is, there is a possibility that the special combination is won in the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the winning combination is won or not, since the continuous performance A in which the setting value is suggested is executed, the setting value can be estimated without waiting for the winning of the special role or winning the special role. In addition, the character a and the character e are not always selected in the continuous effect A, and even if the character a and the character e are selected, the setting is not performed if the continuous effect A is executed once or twice. The value cannot be determined, and in order to be sure of the estimated set value, it is necessary to consider the selection rate of the character in a considerable number of continuous performances B. Even if the state of not winning continues, in order to infer the set value, it is possible to effectively maintain the motivation of the player to try to continue the game.

  In addition, the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested is executed on the condition that the continuous effect A is selected when the combination of watermelons or the RT transition combination is aligned with any winning line, and the continuous effect A Since A is selected at a higher rate as the set value is higher, the execution frequency of the continuous performance A is relatively lower when the set value is lower than when the set value is high. When the value is low, it is necessary to stack more games until the set value is confident, and a high operating rate can be realized even when the set value is low.

  In addition, since the continuous performance A is selected at a different rate according to the game history, the setting value is suggested at a more preferable frequency according to the situation from the game history, that is, the player's past game result. Continuous production A can be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, in a situation where the game history is unfavorable for the player, the continuous performance A is selected at a higher rate than the situation where the game history is advantageous to the player. The situation that is disadvantageous to the player makes it easier to guess the set value. Even in such a situation, the player's willingness to continue the game can be effectively maintained in order to guess the set value. it can.

  Further, among the characters a to e, the characters a to c and e may be selected in all settings, but the character d is selected only when the set value is 6, that is, the highest set value. Since there is a possibility that the character d is the main character, the continuous effect A is executed, and the maximum setting value is determined. By having the character d that is determined to be the highest set value, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained more effectively.

  Character b is selected at a higher rate when the set value is odd than at an even number, and character c is selected at a higher rate when the set value is even than at an odd number. From the appearance frequency of the continuous production B in which the character b is the main character and the continuous production B in which the character c is the main character, it can be estimated to some extent whether the setting value is an odd setting or an even setting. The accuracy of the estimation can be increased, but if the continuous production B is not executed a considerable number of times, it cannot be determined whether the setting is an odd setting or an even setting. The player's willingness to continue can be maintained more effectively. Furthermore, the combination of the appearance frequency of the characters b and c and the appearance frequency of the characters a and e is complicated, and it becomes difficult to be sure because the suspicion occurs in the estimated allowable stage, thereby increasing the difficulty of setting estimation. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of the characters b and c among the plurality of characters. For example, a specific character varies depending on the set value during the continuous performance. It may be configured to appear at a ratio, and a setting value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of a specific character.

  Also, in this embodiment, the production in which the set value is suggested is triggered when the combination of watermelons or RT transitional roles are aligned on any winning line, but the special role winning or It is only necessary that an effect in which a set value is suggested without waiting for a special role winning. For example, when a specific role other than the special role is won or won, when the power is turned on, BB After the end, etc., the specified number of games has passed from a certain starting point, the number of times that a specific role has been won or won from a certain starting point has reached the specified number, the payout rate of medals, the number of increased medals, medals An effect in which the set value is suggested may be executed when the decrease number of the game reaches the specified value. Even in such a case, the special role is not won or the special There even if the state of not winning continues, in order to infer the set value, it is possible to effectively maintain the motivation of the player to try to continue the game.

  In addition, after the power is turned on, the end of the BB, etc., the specified number of games has elapsed from a certain starting point, the number of times that a specific role has been won or won from a certain starting point has reached the specified number of times, the medal payout rate When an effect in which a set value is suggested is triggered when the number of medals increases or the number of medals decreases reaches a specified value, the set value is suggested using a driving tool or the like. Unauthorized sales such as providing slot machines set in a state in which productions are likely to appear to players, for example, at the start of business at a game store, etc., may be carried out, which may impair the fairness of the game. Such fraud can be prevented by taking measures to prevent the use of the driving tool, such as restricting the release of the connection of the connector by the connector restricting member.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous production A, that is, the production in which the set value is suggested, is selected at a higher rate as the set value is higher, but at least more advantageous than the set value having the highest advantage. The setting value with the lowest setting value only needs to produce an effect in which the setting value is suggested at a lower ratio. For example, the setting value is 3 or less than the setting value is 4 or less. The setting value is suggested at a lower rate when the setting value is an even setting value including the highest setting value than when the setting value is an odd setting value including the lowest setting value. You may make it perform the produced effect.

  Also, in this embodiment, after selecting either one of the continuous effects A and B, the result notification effect is executed over a certain time, and whether the continuous effect A is finally selected or the continuous effect B is selected. If the result notification effect is canceled halfway before a certain time has elapsed, that is, before the result notification, the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed, For example, even if the continuous effect A is selected, the result notification indicating that the continuous effect B is selected is performed, and then the continuous effect B is executed. As a result, after the start of the result notification effect, the set value is suggested on the condition that the result notification effect has ended after a certain period of time has elapsed without the betting number setting operation or credit or betting amount adjustment operation being performed. Since the continuous effect A is executed, the player does not cancel the effect until the result notification effect ends in order to estimate the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the willingness of the player to execute the result notification effect to the end without canceling the result notification effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced to the extent originally intended by the result notification effect. On the other hand, if the betting number setting operation or credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed, the result notification effect can be canceled, and the player can select whether to execute the result notification effect until the end. For a player who wants to advance the game ahead of making the setting guess, the game can be advanced.

  In this embodiment, after the start of the result notification effect, the set value is set on the condition that the result notification effect has ended after a certain period of time has elapsed without the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting number adjustment operation being performed. However, when the result notification effect ends without being canceled in the middle, there is an effect in which the set value is suggested at a higher rate than if it was canceled in the middle. The same effects as described above can be obtained as a configuration to be executed.

  In addition, the effect executed when the result notification effect ends without being canceled in the middle is not limited to the effect in which the set value is suggested, but information that is advantageous to the player when the player progresses the game ( For example, any effect may be used as long as the above-mentioned falling role type notification is notified.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous effect A is selected, one of the pseudo reel game and the touch game is executed. In the pseudo reel game, when a specific symbol combination can be arranged on the pseudo reel through the operation of the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, or in the touch game, the specified value is obtained through the operation of the touch panel. In contrast to the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested when the above-mentioned specification is acquired, the start switch 7 is not operated or the start switch 7 is operated after the pseudo reel game is started. However, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R is not operated and the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed during the pseudo reel game, When the touch game ends without any touch panel operation in the game or before the touch game ends When the touch game is stopped due to a betting number setting operation or a credit or betting amount adjustment operation, the continuous effect B is executed instead of the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested. . That is, in order to infer the set value, it is necessary to actively operate the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the touch panel that are not directly related to the game. Can increase the willingness to perform technical interventions that are not directly related to each other, so that it is possible to effectively utilize the functions that can be produced using these operation means.

  In this embodiment, after the pseudo reel game is started, the start switch 7 is not operated or the start switch 7 is operated, but the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated, and the pseudo reel game is not operated. In the middle of the game, when the bet number setting operation or credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed, the pseudo reel game is stopped, or when the touch game is finished without any touch panel operation in the touch game, or the touch game If the touch game is canceled due to a betting number setting operation or a credit or betting amount adjustment operation before the end of the game, the continuous effect suggested by the setting value is not executed. When technical intervention is performed by operating the start switch 7 and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, or touch When the technical intervention is performed through the operation of the touch panel in the system, an effect that suggests the set value is performed at a higher rate than when the technical intervention is not performed. Similar effects can be obtained.

  In addition, when the technical intervention is performed by operating the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pseudo reel game, or when the technical intervention is performed through the operation of the touch panel in the touch game, The production is not limited to the production in which the set value is suggested, and any production in which information that is advantageous to the player when the player progresses the game (for example, the above-described drop role type notification) may be used.

  Also, in this embodiment, the continuous production A that suggests a set value is triggered by the combination of watermelons or RT transitions that are likely to be selected as special roles on any winning line. Since it is executed, the set value is suggested by the continuous performance A, and the possibility of winning the special role is also suggested, so that the expectation for the special role can be increased. Furthermore, since the continuous performance is executed in duplicate with the RT in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won, the result of the continuous performance, that is, whether or not the special role is won. It can be noticed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of combinations are determined in advance as the production patterns of each game constituting the continuous production regardless of the type of the continuous production. When the sub CPU 91a starts the continuous production, the sub CPU 91a selects the combination of the production patterns at a ratio according to whether or not the special combination is won. For example, if the ratio of the first combination selected from the first combination and the second combination is higher when the special combination is won than when the special combination is not selected, the first combination When the continuous effect is executed, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced as compared with the case where the continuous effect is executed with the second combination.

  On the other hand, after the start of continuous production, even before the end, watermelons and cherries that may have been elected as special roles will win, RT transition roles will be aligned on any winning line, Opportunities may be derived, and in this case, the possibility of winning a special role increases, but if the combination of production patterns is determined in advance as described above, watermelon and cherry Even if a winning combination is made, an RT transition combination is arranged in any winning line, or a chance is derived, there is no change in the flow of the continuous production, and the expectation of the special combination by the continuous production does not change.

  For this reason, in this example, after the start of continuous production, when the watermelon and cherry who are likely to have won the special role before the end, the RT transition role will be placed in one of the winning lines. When the chances are derived, the combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles rather than the combination of production patterns of continuous production currently being executed, that is, when the special role is won The selected ratio is changed to a combination of effect patterns higher than the current combination, and the remaining continuous effects are executed based on the changed combination. As a result, after a continuous production based on a combination of production patterns that indicate the possibility of winning a special role, especially a combination of production patterns that can not be expected for the special role, the watermelon and cherry are added. If there is a possibility of winning a special role, as a result of winning a prize, or a line-up of any winning line in RT, or a chance chance being derived, it is suggested that the possibility increases. The content of the continuous performance will also change to the content that can be expected to win the special role from the current one, so it can effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role depending on the event that occurred during the continuous performance it can.

  In this example, after the start of continuous production, when a watermelon or cherry who has a possibility of winning a special role has been won before the end of the production, the RT transition role is aligned on any winning line. When a chance or chance is derived, change the combination of the production patterns of the continuous production currently being executed to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles, and change the remaining continuous production It is designed to be executed based on the combination, but after the start of the continuous production, when the watermelon and cherry who are suggested to have won the special role before the end, the RT transition role will be When the winning line is aligned or when the chance is derived, at least one game effect pattern (for example, the remaining one game effect pattern, etc.) among the remaining continuous effects In regard to, it may be possible to change to a production pattern corresponding to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles rather than the combination of production patterns that are initially executed. After the start of the continuous production showing the possibility of being active, before the end of the stage, the watermelon will win further, the chance eyes will be aligned with any of the winning lines, the chance eyes will be derived, and the special role will be won If the possibility increases and the possibility increases, the content of the production of the continuous production will also change to the content that can be expected to win the special role, so special depending on the event that occurred during the continuous production It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the role.

  Next, a bonus effect executed when BB (6) or BB (7) wins will be described.

  When the sub CPU 91a wins BB (6) or BB (7), the sub CPU 91a does not perform the winning notification effect as when the other combination wins, and further shifts to BB (6) and BB (7). Will continue to play the game state up to that point.

  Furthermore, the combination of BB (6) and BB (7) is composed of “bell” and “replay”, which are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number arranged on each reel. In addition, it is composed of two or more types of symbols, making it difficult to understand that they are aligned with the winning line.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 19, when BB (6) or BB (7) wins and the game state shifts to BB, a winning notice lottery is performed during the notice period of up to three games, and the winning notice lottery is won. , A bonus notification effect for notifying the transition to BB is performed. If the winning lottery is not won during the notice period, the bonus notice effect is forcibly performed at the end of the three games.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes the first small role announcement effect at a higher rate than the second small role notification effect when the small role is elected alone outside the notification period, whereas the sub CPU 91a is small in the notification period. When the winning combination is won, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect. In the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed less frequently than the notification period. The second small role announcement effect is executed at a high frequency.

  After the bonus announcement effect, the first bonus effect is executed until the total number of payouts in BB exceeds 100, which is the BB end condition associated with winning of BB (7), and the total number of payouts in BB is 100. The first bonus effect ends with the game exceeding the number of cards. And if it is BB accompanying the winning of BB (8), the bonus production will be finished as it is with BB, while if it is BB accompanying the winning of BB (6), until the end of the next game. Continue notification at any timing in between (determining any of the betting number setting operation, start operation, and stop operation by lottery), and the total number of payouts in BB is associated with winning of BB (6) The second bonus effect is executed until the BB end condition exceeds 300 sheets, and the second bonus effect is ended in a game in which the total number of payouts in the BB exceeds 300 sheets. Also ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when BB (6) or BB (7) wins, BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) win like BB or RB. Until the announcement period ends after the transition to BB with the winning of BB (6) or BB (7) The fact that BB (6) or BB (7) has won a prize and has already shifted to BB has been announced. BB (6) or BB (7) can be recognized as suddenly BB has started, and the player can be surprised. It can effectively enhance the interest.

  Also, the combination of BB (6) and BB (7) is composed of “bell” and “replay” which are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number arranged on each reel. And it is composed of two or more kinds of symbols and it becomes difficult to know that the winning line is aligned, so it becomes difficult to determine that BB (6) or BB (7) has won, It can be impressed that BB (6) or BB (7) has started.

  Also, since BB (6) or BB (7) wins and shifts to BB and shifts to RB at the same time, the winning probability of Bell greatly increases, so BB (6) or BB (7) wins When transitioning to BB, it can be recognized that the bonus notification effect has been executed after the sign state (notification period) in which the bell frequently wins, Even if the player wins the prize by himself, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  In addition, when a small role is elected alone outside the announcement period, the first small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate than the second small role announcement production, whereas the small role is elected during the announcement period. The second small role announcement effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect, and the second frequency that is executed less than the notification period is low in the notification period. The small role notification effect is executed at a high frequency, and the player's expectation during the notification period can be effectively increased by accompanying the second small role notification effect.

  Further, the BB accompanying the winning of BB (6) and the BB accompanying winning of BB (7) differ in the number of payouts as an end condition, that is, the amount of medals that can be acquired during BB, and as described above, BB ( Even if the combination of 6) and BB (7) is aligned on the winning line, it is difficult for the player to understand. After the bonus notification, in the first bonus performance period, BB (7) Since the same first bonus effect is also executed in the BB accompanying the winning of), it is difficult to determine whether or not the BB will continue thereafter when the first bonus effect ends. It is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the BB to continue in this game.

  Also, if BB continues, there is a possibility that continuation notification may be made at multiple timings during the period until the next game ends, and it is not known when it will be notified, so it gives a moderate tension This makes it possible to effectively enhance the interest and maintain the expectation that the game will continue until the game ends.

  As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  For example, in the first embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control using a stop control table created from table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as a table method) is applied. In addition, it is possible to search for a retractable position at each stop operation timing, and apply stop control (hereinafter also referred to as a control method) based on the search result, or stop control by both the table method and the control method (hereinafter referred to as table + (Also called a control method) may be applied.

  Moreover, you may use these several systems together. For example, as a result of the internal lottery, by using both the table-type stop control and the control-type stop control according to the reel stop time (first stop, second stop, or third stop), As a result of all the internal lotteries, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop times of the reels, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, when a winning combination is missed, the stop control is performed by the table method using the stop control table for a relatively larger number of stopping times than when the winning combination is won. It is possible to diversify display results when a winning combination is won and the winning combination is missed.

  In particular, among the roles in which a special combination is missed, the display results when the special combination is missed can be diversified by performing stop control by the table method using the stop control table when the special combination is elected. In addition, even in the case of a loss that has not been won by any of the roles, it is possible to diversify the display results in the case of a loss by performing stop control using the table method using the stop control table. The degree of freedom in designing the display results that can appear both when winning a role and when not winning is expanded. That is, since the stop position in the case of losing can be limited by the stop control table, it is easy to adjust the stop position and the appearance ratio that are likely to be selected as a special role.

  On the other hand, when a role that does not miss is elected, the relationship with the display result when the special role is missed is weak. In other words, since a special role cannot be expected when a role that does not miss out appears, there is little need to diversify display results when a role that does not miss out is won. For this reason, when a winning combination that does not miss is won, stop control is effectively performed by performing stop control by a control method that does not use the stop control table for a relatively large number of stopping times than when winning a winning combination. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table. That is, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, since the stop control is always performed in the table system for the first stop, the number of sliding symbols that will not stop from the stop control table selected when the special role is won is determined from the stop control table selected when the special role is not won. Control for deriving a reach (so-called 1st) that is established when a display result is derived for the first stop reel by selecting the registered stop control table and performing the first stop control. It becomes possible to design easily.

  In the first embodiment, even at RT (1), the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1. However, at RT (1), the expected increase rate of medals per game is 1 or less, Alternatively, the value of RT (2) can be relatively increased by doing in this way, so that the player to transition to RT (2) is controlled by RT (1). Can be further enhanced.

  Also, after RT (1) starts, when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins, and when moving to RT (2), any special role is not won and replay (2 ) Also ends RT (1) when the specified number of games is reached without winning, but when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins and RT (2) When transitioning to, when a falling combination wins, any special combination is not won, replay (2), and when the specified number of games is reached without winning any falling combination, RT (1) is terminated. Alternatively, RT (1) is not provided with the specified number of games, and after RT (1) starts, when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins and RT (2) RT (1) will be terminated when transitioning to or when the faller wins a prize It may be.

  Moreover, although it transfers to RT (1) after completion | finish of BB, you may make it transfer to RT (1) after completion | finish of any one kind of BB, and another opportunity, for example, You may make it transfer to RT (1) after completion | finish of RB, and change to RT (1) when the combination of the transition role of RT (1) different from the transition role of RT (2) has been prepared. You may make it do.

  In the first embodiment, after RT (2) starts, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is not terminated and any special role is RT (2) is ended when winning a prize, when one of the cherries, that is, when a falling role is won, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning a special role or a falling role, RT (2) may not be provided with the prescribed number of games, and after RT (2) starts, RT (2) may be terminated when any special combination wins or when a falling combination wins. . In addition, after RT (2) is started without any falling combination, RT (2) is ended when any special combination wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination You may make it let it.

  In addition, in the state where any special role is elected, RT (2) will not end even if a fallen role wins during RT (2), but any special role will be elected. Regardless of whether or not the player falls down during RT (2), RT (2) may be terminated.

  In addition, a winning procedure for any type of falling combination is always assigned to all operating procedures that can be operated by the player, and an operating procedure for avoiding winning of any type of falling combination is included. However, by including a winning procedure for at least one other type of falling role, there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of falling roles. A configuration in which part or all of them are common may be used.

  Furthermore, an operation procedure that avoids winnings may be provided for all the falling combinations for all the operation procedures that can be operated by the player. In such a case, it is ensured by the technical intervention of the player. RT (2) can be continued up to the prescribed number of games. In this case, it is preferable to provide an operation procedure that can avoid both the special combination and the fallen combination. By doing so, both the special combination and the fallen combination can be avoided by a common operation procedure.

  Further, at the time when the falling combination wins at RT (2), the game shifts from the next game to the normal game state. If a special RT transition combination that ends in step) is applied and the falling combination wins, the special RT transition may be made to transition to the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the winning probabilities of all types of falling roles are the same probability, but different winning probabilities may be obtained depending on the types of falling roles, and in this way, the type with the highest winning probability in the normal gaming state. By performing the stop operation in the winning combination procedure of the falling combination, the medal payout rate in the normal gaming state can be increased, and during RT (2), the stopping operation is performed by the avoidance procedure of the type of falling combination having a high winning probability. By performing the above, it is possible to increase the probability of avoiding the end of RT (2). That is, since the difference in the player's advantage depends on whether or not the player performs technical intervention, the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, by placing the symbols that make up the falling combination beyond the drawing range, it is possible to avoid winning the falling combination by performing a reel stop operation at a timing outside the drawing range. A different reel stop order for avoiding winnings is determined for multiple falling combinations, and when any of the falling combinations wins, the winning determined according to the type of the falling combination is avoided. When a stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels for the purpose, control is performed so that the falling combination is missed, and if the stop operation is performed in a different order from the stop order of the reels to avoid the winning, The winning combination may be awarded, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the falling winning prize from being won by a relatively simple technical intervention. In this case, it is preferable that other small roles are elected at the same time as the fallen role, and when the fallen role is missed, the other small roles that are elected at the same time win the prize. Even if a fallen role is missed, a small role wins and a medal can be obtained.

  In the first embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4), and RB, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (5) to (7 ) And RB.

  The initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RB, RT (5) to (7), after BB or RB is finished, after setting change, after RT (5) is finished, after RT (6) is finished, RT Transition is made after the end of (7). RB is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) or Bell wins in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), the special part (only when the special part is not carried over) and The lottery probability of a small role is the same as the initial gaming state, but the replay time (5) in which the lottery probability of replay (2) is higher than the initial gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1. ) (RT (5)). RT (5) is a specified number of games without winning any special role (in this embodiment, if RT (5) is transferred by replay (1) winning 200 games, RT transferred by bell winning If (5), 100 games) are reached, or one of the special roles is won before reaching the specified number of games, the game ends.

  In addition, when any of the black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries wins in the initial gaming state (except when any special part is elected), the special part (only if the special part is not carried over) ) And the small lottery probability is the same as the initial game state, but the replay (1) lottery probability is higher than the initial game state, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds one (1) 6) Control to (RT (6)). RT (6) reaches the specified number of games (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  RT (6) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if any of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries wins during RT (5), the transition is made to RT (6). Once it is controlled to RT (5), RT (5) ends and then RT (6) is reached until either black cherry, net cherry or white cherry wins in the initial gaming state. There is no migration.

  Also, replay (2) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), RT (5), RT (6) (excluding the state where any special part is elected) When winning a prize, the lottery probability of special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles are the same as the initial gaming state, but the lottery probability of replay (1) is higher than the initial gaming state And the replay time (7) (RT (7)) in which the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1 is controlled. While the gaming state is in RT (7), RT (7) continues until any special combination is won, and ends by winning any special combination.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the initial game state (excluding the state in which any special role is won), that is, after the end of BB or RB, after the setting change, after the end of RT (5) or RT (6 In the gaming state after), there is a possibility that both RT (5) where an increase in medals cannot be expected and RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once transitioning to RT (6) from the initial gaming state, an opportunity to transition to RT (6) again is provided even after RT (6) is completed, and RT (6) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (5), there is no transition to RT (6) until the end of the RT (5), but when RT (5) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to periodically shift to RT (6) will come. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that may shift to RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (5), it shifts to RT (6). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In addition, in the initial gaming state, if any of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry wins, the game moves to RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected. Since the stop operation cannot be performed simultaneously with the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the right reel that constitutes the If you don't know the type, you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries, and you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries with a 1/3 chance. Yes, but you won't be able to move to RT (6) in this case because you missed the winning cherry with a probability of 2/3.

  As described above, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, after RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT RT (6) is terminated when any special combination wins without finishing (6), or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination. After the start of (6), even if any special role is elected before reaching the specified number of games, if the elected special role does not win, RT (6) will end with the election of the special role Without winning the winning special role, it is possible to continue to control RT (6) until the specified number of games is reached, so even if the special role is won in RT (6) If the winning special role is not awarded, Until you reach the number game it is possible to digest the RT (6), there is no possibility that would give a loss feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (6) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (6).

  Further, in the initial gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to RT (6) which is advantageous for a player who can expect an increase in medals by winning one of black cherry, net cherry or white cherry, while replay ( 1) If any of the bells wins, an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility that the player may move to RT (5), which is disadvantageous for a player who does not move to RT (6). When the replay (1) and the bell are won in the initial game state, the game moves to RT (5), which is disadvantageous for the player. However, when RT (5) is completed, the game is shifted to the initial game state again. For this reason, even if the transition to RT (5) is made without transitioning to RT (6) in the initial gaming state, the transition to the initial gaming state is performed again thereafter, so there is a possibility of transitioning to RT (6) periodically. The initial gaming state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (6) can be maintained.

  In the initial gaming state, when any of black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries is won, the operating procedure matches the winning conditions for the selected cherries, that is, the pull-in range of combinations of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. Since the player can perform the stop operation at the internal timing, that is, the game can be shifted to RT (6) by the player's technical intervention, the interest in the initial game state can be enhanced. At this time, the operation procedure as a winning condition varies depending on the type of cherry, and since there is no common winning procedure for all types of cherries, the player guesses which type of cherries was won, Whether or not to shift to RT (6) is determined depending on whether or not the game is won, and the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even if the replay (1) or bell wins in the initial gaming state and the transition to RT (5) where no increase in medals can be expected, an increase in medals can be expected in RT (5) and either RT (5) for which an increase in medals cannot be expected because the winning probability of replay (2), which will continue to RT (7), which continues until the special role is won, is higher than the initial gaming state and RT (6) Even in the case of shifting to, the player's expectation for shifting to RT (7) can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a sets the set value on the condition that the number of games digested has reached the specified number of games after the start of RT (5), which is disadvantageous to the player, that is, the end of RT (5). The suggestion is executed. Thus, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained until RT (5), which is a disadvantageous state for the player and the player is likely to end the game, is ended.

  In this embodiment, an effect that suggests a set value is executed on the condition that RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player, but after RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player, After a certain number of games have elapsed, an effect that suggests a set value may be executed at a higher rate than before, in which case the player is in a disadvantageous state and the player Even if RT (5) is likely to end the game, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained up to a certain number of games, and then RT (5) ends. Since the number of games up to is less than that at the beginning of RT (5), the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained until RT (5) ends.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (2) is increased at RT (5). However, it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 1) may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In addition, the replay (1) lottery probability is increased in RT (6), but it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The probability may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  Also, replay (2) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), RT (5), RT (6) (excluding the state where any special part is elected) Is controlled to RT (7) when winning a prize, but is controlled to RT (7) when replay (2) wins only in any specific gaming state (for example, the initial gaming state). In this way, by controlling to a specific gaming state in this way, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation to move to RT (7).

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the game state is the normal game state, RT (1) to (4), and RB, whereas in this embodiment, the game state is the normal game state, single bonus (hereinafter referred to as SB). ), RT (8), RT (9), and RB.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to BB (1) to (7) and RB (1) to (4) of Embodiment 1 described above as special roles, single bonuses (1) to (3) (hereinafter referred to as SB ( 1) to (3)). SB (1) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Network 7” is aligned on any winning line in the normal gaming state or SB, and SB (2) is either in the normal gaming state or SB. SB (3) is a combination of “Replay-Replay-Black 7” on any winning line in the normal gaming state or SB when the “Replay-Replay-White 7” combination is aligned on the winning line. Wins when you have the right.

  If any of SB (1) to (3) wins in the normal gaming state and SB, only one game is controlled to SB where the winning probability of the bell is slightly increased.

  In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state and SB, SB (1) + black cherry, SB (2) + net cherry, SB (3) + white cherry are targeted for internal lottery, black cherry, net cherry, white Cherry and SB (1) to (3) are not subject to internal lottery alone. In RT (8), which is shifted by winning one of BB (1) to (3), black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are subject to internal lottery alone, and SB (1) to ( Special roles including 3) are not eligible for internal lottery.

  Of the small roles, the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry (including the case of simultaneous winning with SB (1) to (3)) is any of the normal gaming state, SB, and RT (8). The same is true in the gaming state, and the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher in SB than in the normal gaming state and RT (8).

  Also, SB (1) to (3) are special roles, but unlike BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4), they are valid only in the game in which the winning flag is won. Even if SB (1) to (3) are won and cannot be won, they are not carried over to the next game.

  In the first embodiment, the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are paid out at the time of winning three (6 to match two winning lines), whereas in this embodiment, the black cherry is paid out. , Net cherries and white cherries are paid out at the time of winning 15 prizes.

  In the present embodiment, when SB (1) + black cherry is won, priority is given to the control for aligning SB (1), which is a special role, with the winning lines L1 to L5 over SB (1). It is possible to win black cherries only if the player cannot withdraw. For this reason, the area numbers 1 to 7 of the right reel are the drawing range of the “black cherry” that constitutes the black cherry, and among these, the area number 5 that is the drawing range of the “net 7” that constitutes the SB (1). When operated at the timing of ˜7, “black cherry” is not drawn into the winning lines L1 to L5, but “net 7” is drawn, and the winning of black cherries is limited.

  When SB (2) + net cherry is selected, priority is given to the control of aligning SB (2), which is a special role, with winning lines L1 to L5 over net cherry, and SB (2) cannot be drawn Only the net cherry can be awarded. For this reason, the area numbers 0, 15 to 20 of the right reel are the pull-in range of “net cherry” that forms the net cherry, and among these, the area that is the pull-in range of “white 7” that forms SB (2) When operated at the timings of numbers 0, 19, and 20, “net cherry” is not drawn into the pay lines L1 to L5, but “white 7” is drawn, and net cherry wins are restricted. Become.

  When SB (3) + white cherry is elected, priority is given to the control of aligning SB (3), which is a special role, with winning lines L1 to L5 over white cherry, and SB (3) cannot be drawn It is only possible to win a white cherry. For this reason, the area numbers 8 to 14 of the right reel are the pull-in range of “white cherry” that constitutes the white cherry, and among these, the area number 12 that is the pull-in range of “black 7” that constitutes SB (3). When operated at the timing of ˜14, “white cherry” is not drawn into the pay lines L1 to L5, but “black 7” is drawn, and the winning of white cherry is restricted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when any of the cherries is won in the normal gaming state or in the SB, the cherry pull-in is restricted by the SB that is won at the same time. In addition, in SB (1) to (3), “replay” that is not missed is applied as a configuration symbol of the middle reel and the right reel, and therefore, when the right reel is stopped regardless of the stop order of the reels. Will be limited by the SB that is won at the same time. On the other hand, in RT (8), since the cherries are won by themselves, the SB winning is not limited in the pulling in of cherries. In RT (8), any of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) will always be selected, so the cherry specials will be limited by the selected special role. However, in this case, if the left reel is stopped before the other reels outside the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the elected special role, the withdrawal of the cherry is restricted by the elected special role. Can be avoided.

  In this embodiment, the expected payout value per game in the normal gaming state (the average value of the payout number per game, that is, the winning probability of each role × the total value of the payout number of the role) is less than 3, Since the number of bets required to start the game in the gaming state is 3, the number of medals decreases, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. In addition, in SB, the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, so the expected payout per game is slightly higher, but it is still less than 3, and the medal is decreased per game. The medal payout rate is less than 1.

  In the normal gaming state and SB, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols constituting these roles, and the substantial appearance rate becomes 1/3, and the above-mentioned As black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are elected at the same time as any single bonus, and the pull-in is limited by the single bonus that is won, the appearance rate of cherries is further reduced, making it a substantial game The expected payout value per game, the actual payout rate per game, is further reduced.

  In this way, in SB, the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, so in SB, the expected payout value per game is higher and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the normal gaming state. It will be advantageous to the player, but the difference is slight.

  In addition, the substantial payout expected value in SB is less than 3, whereas the payout number to be paid out when any cherry wins as described above is 15 so that the normal gaming state and SB When any one of SBs (1) to (3) is won at the same time as one of the cherries, more medals can be obtained by winning the selected cherry.

  In this embodiment, when any of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) is won in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of the small role is the same as that in the normal gaming state. The replay time (8) (RT (8)) is controlled so that the combined probability of the replay (1) and the replay (2) is higher than the normal gaming state. RT (8) ends when the winning special combination wins.

  Since the payout rate of medals per game in RT (8) exceeds 1, an increase in medals can be expected, but black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles. The substantial appearance rate is 1/3, and considering this, the actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (8) is less than 1, and the medals decrease.

  When any of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) is elected, the sub CPU 91a of the present embodiment informs the type of the special role elected and the type of cherry. A game number distribution lottery is performed in which the number of games to be controlled at the assist time during which the cherry type notification is performed is selected from a plurality of different predetermined numbers of games.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a sets the number of games selected in the game number distribution lottery in the RAM 91c, and controls the assist time until the number of games is consumed, during which any of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry is selected. When Kaga wins, a cherry type notification for notifying the type is executed.

  As with the fall type combination notification in Example 1, the cherry type notification is a color or pattern (black cherry) indicating that the black cherry has been won, the net cherry has been won, or the white cherry has been won. Black to indicate that it has won, shaded to indicate that net cherry has been won, and white to indicate that white cherry has been won) It is only necessary to inform the player of the type of cherries that have been won, suggesting the types of cherries that have been selected, the combination of the cherries themselves, the combination of symbols, and the types of cherries. A notification may be made by displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51, or a notification may be made by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a symbol that differs depending on the type of cherry (such as a symbol that is located near the symbol of the cherry and that stands out from the symbol of the cherry), an image that suggests the symbol, etc. Anyway.

  In addition, in particular, when the winning cherries are limited by the type of the winning BB, in addition to the notification of the cherry type, an operating procedure for avoiding the constituent symbols of the special role won by the left reel, that is, the winning cherry The procedure for preventing the pull-in is not restricted is notified.

  In this embodiment, the number of games is applied as the assist time end condition. However, the assist time end condition can be selected in various ways. For example, the winning of the winning special role, the number of games and the cherry type Number of notifications to be executed, number of cherry wins to reach a specified number, winning or winning a specific role, winning or winning a specific role to reach a specified number, winning a final lottery, etc. Is applicable. Further, the end condition may be changed during the assist time. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to end the assist time for each prescribed number of games, and the lottery is won by winning the lottery.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the right reel constituting black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are intentionally stopped on the winning line. Since black cherries, net cherries and white cherries are won, it is impossible to deliberately win these black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. Although it is possible to win with a probability of 1/3, it will be missed with a probability of 2/3.

  On the other hand, in the assist time, when any of black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won, the cherry type notification is executed, so that the player is notified of the black cherry, It becomes possible to recognize which kind of cherry is won among the net cherry and white cherry, and the “black cherry” design, “net cherry” design, It is possible to specify the stop operation position where the “white cherry” symbol stops on the winning line, and it is possible to win all the winning cherries.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (8) is less than 1 and the number of medals will decrease, but it was won by being controlled by the assist time. Since black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries can all be won, the payout rate of medals per game in this case exceeds 1.

  For this reason, when BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) are elected and controlled to RT (8), medals increase while the assist time is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to win more medals if RT (8) is continued without winning the selected special combination. On the other hand, after the assist time is over, medals will decrease and no special lottery will be drawn, so it is better for the player to finish the RT (8) by winning the winning special role It will be advantageous.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a has a combination of “watermelon / orange-watermelon / orange-watermelon / orange” aligned in any winning line in the normal gaming state, that is, when the watermelon has won, or the RT transition role When one of the winning lines is aligned, the lottery probability of the special role, small role, and replay (2) is the same as the normal gaming state, but the winning probability of the replay (1) is higher than the normal gaming state ( RT (8)) and the replay time (9) (RT (9)) is controlled so that the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or less. RT (9) reaches the specified number of games (5 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games, The process is terminated by shifting to RT (8).

  In this way, when any of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) is won in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than that in the normal gaming state RT (8 ), And if a re-playing role and a special role are elected at the same time, the combination of symbols constituting the re-playing role is preferentially drawn into the winning line over the combination of symbols constituting the special role. Control is performed, and even if a special role is elected, it is difficult to find a combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether the special role is won or not. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation for winning.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a combination of watermelons or RT transitions that suggest the possibility of winning a special role in the normal gaming state is aligned with any winning line, a maximum of five games can be obtained from the normal gaming state. However, RT (8) or RT (9) is triggered when the combination of watermelons or RT transitional combination is aligned with any winning line. ), Even if a special role has been won, it is difficult to find a combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether the special role has been won. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation for the possibility of winning the special role suggested by being in any winning line.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the number of games (Y · Z) in which the winning of a re-playing role that makes it difficult to win a special role during the continuous performance is expected, and the continuous performance. Necessary to determine the number of special roles that do not overlap each other, that is, whether or not any special role has been elected. Since the continuous production is executed over the number of games less than the sum of the number of games and the number of games, it is determined whether the special role suggested by the continuous production is won or not until the continuous production is finished. Since it is difficult to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role until the end of the continuous performance, it is difficult to win the special role during the continuous performance. Winning probability Since the number of games of continuous production in consideration is determined, without the operation procedure of the order to winning is to increase the number of different special auditors, respectively, it is possible to increase the number of continuation game of continuous production more than that. In particular, in this embodiment, since the RT is controlled with a high probability of winning a re-playing role during the continuous performance, it is possible to greatly increase the number of continuous games in the continuous performance without increasing the types of special roles. Yes.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, when any one of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) is won, RT (8) is performed until the selected special combination wins. In RT (8), an increase in medals can be expected on the condition that all of the winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are awarded. In other words, when one of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) is elected, it will be controlled to RT (8) which is advantageous to the player, and from BB or RB to RT ( 8) will not continue, but since the gaming state advantageous to the player will continue in the flow from RT (8) to BB and RB, the player's expectation is gradually increased until it is controlled by BB and RB. It is possible to enhance the feeling.

  RT (8) can be expected to increase the number of medals on the condition that all the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries won as described above. However, the winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are expected. In order to win all cherries, the right reel must be stopped at the timing of the “Cherry” symbol drawing range of the color or pattern according to the type of winning cherries. Since the “Black Cherry”, “Net Cherry”, and “White Cherry” symbols on the right reel that make up the white cherry cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, you must know the type of the winning cherry. The winning cherries cannot be won reliably, and an increase in medals cannot be expected just by moving to RT (8).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) are won, not only the transition to RT (8) is performed, but a game number distribution lottery is performed, When one of the cherries wins during the number of winning games, the cherry time notification indicating the type of winning cherries is controlled at the assist time, so the cherry of the color or pattern notified by the cherry type notification is controlled. By aiming at the right reel and performing a stop operation, it is possible to win all the cherries won. However, even though the type of cherry won by assist time will be informed, an increase in medals is not expected if the stop operation cannot be performed accordingly, and the player will be the first to perform technical intervention for the player. Since an advantageous gaming state can be achieved, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, RT (8) continues after any of BB (1) to (5) and RB (1) to (4) wins, until the winning special role wins, but the cherry type notification is executed. Only during the assist time, after the assist time is over, the cherry type notification is not executed even at RT (8), and the technical intervention of the player is virtually impossible. Since the increase in medals can no longer be expected, it is possible to prompt the player to win the special combination that has been won immediately after the assist time is over.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are won in the normal gaming state and SB, that is, when any cherry that cannot be surely won even if won is won, SBs that transfer only one game to SBs that have a higher medal payout rate than in the normal gaming state win simultaneously, so even if one of the cherries wins, it is not possible to win and no medals can be won Can win the game and gain profits from the SB, so it is possible to reduce the player's loss caused by the missed cherry.

  In addition, although SB has a higher medal payout rate than the normal gaming state, the expected payout value is smaller than the number of medals obtained by winning a cherry, so that either cherry wins and the cherry If the player guesses the type of the game and wins the cherry as a result, he can win more medals than if he misses the cherry and wins the SB. The interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, in the normal game state and SB, any cherry and any SB are always won at the same time, and any cherry or any SB is not won alone. In addition to the case where one of the cherries and one of the SBs are always won simultaneously, either one of the cherries or one of the SBs may be won alone.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any cherry and any SB are elected at the same time, and a stop operation is performed at a timing at which both of the winning cherries and the winning SBs can be drawn. In addition, the SB configuration symbol is controlled to be drawn in preference to the cherry configuration symbol, and any special role is won and carried over, that is, during RT (8), the SB is an internal lottery. It becomes out of object. For this reason, when any cherry is won in the normal gaming state, the winning of the cherry won in the normal gaming state, that is, the medal payout rate is reduced by restricting the winning of the winning cherry by the winning SB at the same time. The medal payout rate in RT (8), which is reduced and does not limit the pull-in of the cherry won by SB, can be relatively increased. On the other hand, in RT (8), it is possible to win the winning cherry without performing the stop operation in the troublesome operation procedure of daringly avoiding SB.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as in the first or second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first or second embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment or the second embodiment can also be applied to the third embodiment.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination used as the object of an internal lottery. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of the combination of a combination or combination including watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, (b) is the magnitude relationship of the winning probability of the combination of a combination of watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece or combination FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of special role and the selection rate of an effect, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship of the selection rate of an effect. (A) is a figure which shows the selection rate of continuous production A and B, (b) is a figure which shows the character selection rate in continuous production A. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the bonus production performed when BB (6) or BB (7) wins.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 34 Hopper unit 35 Overflow tank 35a Full tank sensor 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (6)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Replay that allows a player to play a game without using a plurality of types of special prizes and the game value before the display result is derived to the variable display device, with a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning including a re-game winning with a grant of
A carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the generation of the special prize after the next game when the special prize is determined to be permitted and the special prize has not occurred.
When it is determined at the same time that the occurrence of the special prize and the re-game prize are allowed, the display result corresponding to the re-game prize is given priority over the display result corresponding to the special prize. Re-game winning priority derivation control means to be displayed on the variable display device;
When a first special prize out of the plurality of types of special prizes is generated, the first special game state is controlled, and when a second special prize different from the first special prize occurs Special gaming state control means for controlling to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state;
Production type selection means for selecting any type of production with a predetermined selection probability from a plurality of types of production with different production modes including continuous production that continues for a predetermined number of continuous games of two or more games;
Production execution means for executing the type of production selected by the production type selection means;
With
The plurality of types of effects can be selected both when it is determined to allow the first special prize to be generated and when it is determined to allow the second special prize to occur. Directing,
The number of types of the special prize that is not overlapped with each other for the operation procedure for generating the prize: X, it is determined that the re-game prize is allowed to be generated when the continuous production is being executed by the pre-determining means. Probability: Y, and the predetermined number of continuous games of the two or more games of the continuous production: Z, X <Z <X + Y · Z is established,
The selection probability by the production type selection means is:
When it is determined to allow the occurrence of the first special prize or the second special prize, it is determined that a specific effect is selected with the highest probability among the plurality of types of effects,
The probability that it is determined that the generation of the first special prize is allowed when the specific effect is executed, and the second special prize is allowed when the specific effect is executed. The ratio of the probability determined to allow the occurrence of the first special winning occupying the total probability of the probabilities determined to allow the first special winning is permitted by the predetermining means. From the ratio of the probability that it is determined that the occurrence of the first special prize is allowed to occupy the total probability of the probability that it is determined that it is determined and the probability that the occurrence of the second special prize is allowed is determined The slot machine is characterized by being set to be higher. The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Replay that allows a player to play a game without using a plurality of types of special prizes and the game value before the display result is derived to the variable display device, with a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning including a re-game winning with a grant of
A carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the generation of the special prize after the next game when the special prize is determined to be permitted and the special prize has not occurred.
When it is determined at the same time that the occurrence of the special prize and the re-game prize are allowed, the display result corresponding to the re-game prize is given priority over the display result corresponding to the special prize. Re-game winning priority derivation control means to be displayed on the variable display device;
When a first special prize out of the plurality of types of special prizes is generated, the first special game state is controlled, and when a second special prize different from the first special prize occurs Special gaming state control means for controlling to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state;
Production type selection means for selecting any type of production with a predetermined selection probability from a plurality of types of production with different production modes including continuous production that continues for a predetermined number of continuous games of two or more games;
Production execution means for executing the type of production selected by the production type selection means;
With
The plurality of types of effects can be selected both when it is determined to allow the first special prize to be generated and when it is determined to allow the second special prize to occur. Directing,
The number of types of the special prize that is not overlapped with each other for the operation procedure for generating the prize: X, it is determined that the re-game prize is allowed to be generated when the continuous production is being executed by the pre-determining means. Probability: Y, and the predetermined number of continuous games of the two or more games of the continuous production: Z, X <Z <X + Y · Z is established,
The selection probability by the production type selection means is:
When it is determined to allow the occurrence of the first special prize or the second special prize, it is determined that a specific effect is selected with the highest probability among the plurality of types of effects,
The ratio of the probability that the specific effect is selected in the probability that at least one of the multiple types of effects is selected when it is determined that the first special prize is allowed to occur is the first When it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize of 2 is allowed, the ratio of the probability that the specific effect is selected in the probability that at least one of the plural types of effects is selected is higher. A slot machine characterized by that. Special that executes special effects different from the above-mentioned types of effects provided that it is determined that the second special prize is allowed to be generated among the first special prize and the second special prize. 3. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising production execution means . A specific derivation control means for deriving a specific display result to the variable display device when it is determined that the occurrence of any special prize among the plural types of special prizes is permitted;
The specific derivation control means includes any of a plurality of controls including a control in which the specific display result is easily derived or a control in which the specific display result is difficult to be derived according to the type of the special prize determined to be permitted. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the control is performed so that the specific display result is derived based on the selected control. The pre-determining means is a first special decision for simultaneously determining that the first special winning is allowed and the first general winning other than the special winning is allowed, A second special decision that simultaneously determines whether a special prize is allowed and a second general prize other than the special prize is allowed; a second special prize that allows the second special prize; A third special decision that simultaneously determines that the occurrence of the first general prize is allowed, a determination that the occurrence of the second special prize is allowed, and a determination that the occurrence of the second general prize is allowed simultaneously. 4 special decisions can be made,
The ratio of the probability of making the second special decision to the total probability of the probability of making the first special decision and the probability of making the second special decision, and the third special decision are made The first to fourth special determinations are performed with different probabilities that the ratio of the probability that the fourth special determination is made to the total probability of the probability and the probability that the fourth special determination is made is different. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. When it is simultaneously determined that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed and the occurrence of a re-game prize with the grant of a re-game capable of playing a game without using the gaming value, the special prize is given. Replay prize winning priority derivation control means for causing the variable display device to display the display result corresponding to the regame prize in preference to the display result corresponding to
Transition display result derivation control means for performing control for deriving a transition display result when it is determined to allow the occurrence of a specific prize;
When the transition display result is derived, control is performed to a first replay high probability state in which a decision to allow the occurrence of the replay winning is performed with a higher probability than before the transition display result is derived. First replay high probability state control means;
When it is determined that the occurrence of the second special prize is permitted, the determination that the generation of the re-game prize is permitted is made before the fact that the occurrence of the second special prize is permitted. Second replay high probability state control means for controlling to a second replay high probability state performed with a high probability;
With
The pre-determining means is a first specific determination that simultaneously determines that the second special prize is allowed to be generated and the specific prize is allowed to be generated, and that the specific prize is allowed to be generated. A second specific decision can be made,
The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing means includes special effect executing means for executing a special effect when the transition display result is derived.

Images